BC-5390

BC-5390
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
Copyright
©2015-2020 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2020-07 (Version: 7.0).
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
 It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment
to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
 Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION
 Federal law (USA) restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a
physician.
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

unauthorized service people.
II
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial
park,Nanshan,Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
US Contact: Mindray DS USA, Inc.
Address: 800 MacArthur Blvd., Mahwah, NJ 07430-0619,USA
Toll Free: +1(800) 288 2121
III
Table of Contents
Copyright ....................................................................................................................................I
Warranty ..................................................................................................................................II
Exemptions .............................................................................................................................II
Company Contact ..................................................................................................................III
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................1
1 Using This Manual ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Introduction............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 General Operations .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.4 Symbol ..................................................................................................................... 1-2
2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Name ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 Configurations .......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Product Configurations ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 PC Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Physical Properties .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Environment Requirements...................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 Power Requirements ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.6 Test Panels ............................................................................................................... 2-2
2.7 Analysis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.8 Sample Requirements .............................................................................................. 2-3
2.8.1 Aspirated Blood Volume.................................................................................... 2-3
2.8.2 Minimal Sample Volumes.................................................................................. 2-3
2.8.3 Sample Types ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.9 Parameter................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.9.1 Parameter Classification ................................................................................... 2-3
2.10 Performance Requirements ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.10.1 Background Requirements ............................................................................... 2-5
2.10.2 Carryover Requirements ................................................................................... 2-5
2.10.3 Repeatability requirements ............................................................................... 2-6
2.10.4 Linearity Requirements ..................................................................................... 2-7
2.11 Applicable Tubes ...................................................................................................... 2-8
2.11.1 Tube specifications of the closed mode ............................................................ 2-8
2.11.2 Autoloading Tube Specifications ....................................................................... 2-8
2.12 Reagents, Controls and Calibrators ......................................................................... 2-8
2.12.1 Reagents ........................................................................................................... 2-9
2.12.2 Controls and Clibrators ..................................................................................... 2-9
3 Software System ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1
1
Table of Contents
3.2 Password Function ................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3 DMU Installation Instruction ..................................................................................... 3-1
3.3.1 Installation Preparation ..................................................................................... 3-1
3.3.2 Installation ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.3 Update............................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4 Frequently asked questions and the answers .........................................................3-11
3.5 PC End Update .......................................................................................................3-11
3.5.1 Update Preparation ..........................................................................................3-11
3.5.2 Update procedure ........................................................................................... 3-12
3.6 Connection Setup of the DMU and Analyzer ......................................................... 3-15
3.6.1 Analyzer Network Setup ................................................................................. 3-15
3.6.2 Connection Status ........................................................................................... 3-16
3.6.3 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers ..................................................... 3-17
3.7 LIS Setup and Connection ..................................................................................... 3-18
3.7.1 LIS Communication Setup .............................................................................. 3-18
3.7.2 Unidirectional LIS communication .................................................................. 3-19
3.7.3 2-way LIS Communication .............................................................................. 3-24
3.8 Data Backup and Recovery ................................................................................... 3-26
4 Introduction of Major Parameters ................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Parameter Sources .................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2 WBC Measurement .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Flow Cytometry by Laser .................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.2 Electrical Impedance Method ........................................................................... 4-3
4.2.3 Derivation of WBC-Related Parameters ........................................................... 4-3
4.3 HGB Measurement .................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.1 Colorimetric Method .......................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.2 HGB Parameters ............................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 RBC/PLT Measurement ........................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.1 Electrical Impedance Method ........................................................................... 4-4
5 Instrument Warning Messages .................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Error code................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1.1 Pressure Detection ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Temperature Module ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Syringe Module ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.4 Sampling Assembly Module ............................................................................ 5-13
5.1.5 Boards Integrating Module .............................................................................. 5-19
5.1.6 Analog Board .................................................................................................. 5-20
5.1.7 Autoloading Mechanism .................................................................................. 5-23
5.1.8 Reagent Detection .......................................................................................... 5-41
5.1.9 Flow Cell Clog ................................................................................................. 5-43
5.1.10 Background abnormal ..................................................................................... 5-46
5.1.11 HGB Abnormal ................................................................................................ 5-46
5.1.12 Clogging .......................................................................................................... 5-47
2
Table of Contents
5.1.13 Other Errors .................................................................................................... 5-47
6 Luidic System ................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Measurement Flow ................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 WBC&HGB Channel ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 DIFF & optical channel ...................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 RBC/PLT channel.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Sample Volume ........................................................................................................ 6-4
6.3 Temperature of Fluidics ............................................................................................ 6-4
6.4 Reagent Consumption Volume ................................................................................ 6-4
6.5 Introduction to Fluidic Parts ...................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.1 Mindray valves .................................................................................................. 6-5
6.5.2 Two-way pressure proof Mindray valve ............................................................ 6-6
6.5.3 LVM fluidic valve ............................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.4 Pinch valve ........................................................................................................ 6-7
6.5.5 Liquid filter ......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.5.6 Syringe .............................................................................................................. 6-8
6.5.7 Pumps ............................................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.8 Sample probe .................................................................................................. 6-10
6.5.9 Probe wipe .......................................................................................................6-11
6.5.10 Pressure relief valve ....................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.11 Pressure sensor .............................................................................................. 6-12
6.5.12 Aspiration monitoring photocoupler ................................................................ 6-13
6.5.13 Baths ............................................................................................................... 6-14
6.6 Introduction of Fluidic Structure ............................................................................. 6-15
6.6.1 Sample aspiration and dispensing channel .................................................... 6-16
6.6.2 WBC&HGB Channel ....................................................................................... 6-17
6.6.3 DIFF & optical channel .................................................................................... 6-19
6.6.4 RBC/PLT channel............................................................................................ 6-20
6.7 Introduction to Sequences ..................................................................................... 6-21
6.7.1 Closed Whole Blood CD Mode Sample Analysis Sequence .......................... 6-21
6.7.2 Closed Predilute CD Mode Sample Analysis Sequence ................................ 6-58
6.7.3 Autoloader Whole Blood CD Mode Sample Analysis Sequence .................... 6-58
6.7.4 CBC Mode Analysis Sequence ....................................................................... 6-58
6.8 Function of Fluidic Valves ...................................................................................... 6-58
7 Optical System............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle ...................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Optical Path and Workflow of the Optical System ................................................... 7-1
7.3 Components of the Optical System ......................................................................... 7-2
7.4 Optical System Status Determination ...................................................................... 7-3
7.5 Maintenance and Replacement of the Optical System ............................................ 7-5
7.5.1 Maintaining the Optical System ........................................................................ 7-5
7.5.2 Replacing the Optical System ........................................................................... 7-9
7.6 Optical System Gain Calibration .............................................................................7-11
3
Table of Contents
8 Hardware System .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 Analog Board............................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Function ............................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.3 Structure............................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.4 Interfaces .......................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Indicators and test points .................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.6 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3 Digital Control Board (including CPU module) ....................................................... 8-10
8.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.3 Structure...........................................................................................................8-11
8.3.4 Interfaces .........................................................................................................8-11
8.3.5 Indicators and test points ................................................................................ 8-12
8.3.6 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 8-12
8.4 Drive Board ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-16
8.5 Autoloading Board .................................................................................................. 8-20
8.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.5.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.5.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-21
8.5.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-21
8.6 Laser Control Board ............................................................................................... 8-24
8.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-24
8.6.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-24
8.6.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-26
8.7 Preamplification Board ........................................................................................... 8-29
8.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.7.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-30
8.7.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-30
8.7.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-31
4
Table of Contents
8.8 Power Board........................................................................................................... 8-33

8.8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-33
8.8.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-34
8.8.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-35
8.8.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-35
8.9 Fluid Detection Board ............................................................................................. 8-40
8.9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-40
8.9.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-41
8.9.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-41
8.9.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-42
8.10 Indicator Board ....................................................................................................... 8-44
8.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-44
8.10.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-44
8.10.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-44
8.10.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-44
8.11 Key Board............................................................................................................... 8-46
8.11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-46
8.11.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-46
8.11.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-46
8.11.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-47
8.12 Mini Network Board ................................................................................................ 8-47
8.12.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-47
8.12.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-47
8.12.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-48
8.12.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-48
8.13 Optical-coupler Board ............................................................................................ 8-50
8.13.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 8-50
8.13.2 Function .......................................................................................................... 8-50
8.13.3 Structure.......................................................................................................... 8-50
8.13.4 Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8-50
8.14 List of Prefixes of Board Sockets ........................................................................... 8-51
8.15 Connections of Lines and Board ............................................................................ 8-52
5
Table of Contents
8.16 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches ........................................................... 8-57

8.17 Analyzer Status Indicated by the Indicators ........................................................... 8-59
9 Mechanical System ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Analyzer Structure .................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Appearance .............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Layout Introduction ................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4 Autoloading Assembly .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.4.1 Structure Introduction ........................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.2 Relevant Troubleshooting Measures ...............................................................9-11
9.5 Mixing Assembly .................................................................................................... 9-20
9.5.1 Structure Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-20
9.5.2 Relevant Troubleshooting Measures .............................................................. 9-21
9.6 Sampling Assembly ................................................................................................ 9-23
9.6.1 Structure Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-23
9.6.2 Maintaining the Assembly ............................................................................... 9-25
9.7 Replace the Syringe Assembly .............................................................................. 9-31
9.7.1 Structure of the 100ul syringe assembly......................................................... 9-31
9.7.2 Structure of 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly ................................. 9-32
9.7.3 Structure of 2.5ml lead screw driving syringe assembly ................................. 9-33
9.7.4 Structure of 10ml lead screw driving syringe assembly .................................. 9-34
9.7.5 Relevant Troubleshooting Measures .............................................................. 9-35
9.8 Debug Screen Introduction .................................................................................... 9-39
9.9 Adjusting the Position of the Sample Probe ........................................................... 9-40
9.9.1 Sample Probe Up Position Adjustment ........................................................... 9-41
9.9.2 DIFF Bath Up Position Adjustment ................................................................. 9-41
9.9.3 Autoloading Piercing Position Adjustment ...................................................... 9-42
9.9.4 Adjustment of Piercing Position ...................................................................... 9-43
9.10 Adjusting the Clamp Position ................................................................................. 9-44
9.11 Adjusting Built-in Barcode Scanner........................................................................ 9-47
9.12 Floating Blood Catch Unit Adjustment ................................................................... 9-48
9.13 HGB Assembly Replacement ................................................................................. 9-52
9.13.1 Maintenance Protocol ..................................................................................... 9-52
10 Description and Replacement Instruction for Wearing Items ............................. 10-1
10.1 When to Replace and the Tools Needed ............................................................... 10-1

10.2 Replacing the reagent container ............................................................................ 10-1
10.2.1 Replacement of Diluent Container .................................................................. 10-3
10.2.2 Replacing the Lyse Container ......................................................................... 10-3
10.2.3 Replacing the Waste Container ...................................................................... 10-4
10.2.4 Do the following to replace reagent ................................................................ 10-4
10.3 Replacing Sample Probe ....................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 Replacing Fuse ...................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5 Examining the Probe Wipe Filter............................................................................ 10-7
10.6 Examining Air Filter ................................................................................................ 10-8
6
Table of Contents
10.7 Replacing the Rubber Pinch Valve Tubing ............................................................. 10-9

10.8 Clean Closed Probe Wipe and Catch Ring ............................................................ 10-9
10.9 Replacing the Filter .............................................................................................. 10-10
Appendix ............................................................................................................................... A-1
7
1 Using This Manual
 Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operator's manuals.
1.1 Scope
To use this manual effectively, you need the following capabilities:
 Comprehensive knowledge of circuit and fluidics;
 Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;
 Comprehensive knowledge of controls;
 Comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;
 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;
 Using basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology;
 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope;
 Reading pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.
1.2 Introduction
This manual comprises 13 chapters and the fluidic diagrams in appendices.
1.3 General Operations

Name Operation
press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK it

Click
with the mouse.
to CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard or
Enter the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or
to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit that you want to
delete by clicking the left button of the mouse or using
[←][→][Home][End], and then delete the character after the
Delete
cursor by pressing [Del], or delete the character before the cursor
by pressing [BackSpace] ([←] on the upper right part of the soft
keyboard).
1-1
Using This Manual
Click the arrow buttons by the ends of the scroll bar, or move the
Drag Scroll Bar cursor to the slide bar and press the left key of the mouse; or
press the slide bar with your finger.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display the
SELECT from ×× pull-down list, (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
pull-down list CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys
(for pull-down list) ([↑][↓][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the current list and press
[ENTER] to select the desired item.
1.4 Symbol
You will find the following symbols in this manual.
Symbols Meaning
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.

WARNING alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
CAUTION alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or unreliable
analysis results.
NOTE alerting you to information that requires your attention.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
Symbols Meaning
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
Note: suggesting the users consult to
accompanying documents to get important
safety information.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
WARNING, LASER BEAM
1-2
Using This Manual
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
NETWORK INTERFACE
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
LOT No.
EXPIRATION DATE
SERIAL NUMBER
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
TAKE CAUTION WHEN WORKING

AROUND TO AVIOD PRICKING
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
THIS PRODUCT HAS BEEN TESTED TO

THE REQUIREMENTS OF CAN/CSA-C22.2
NO. 61010-1, SECOND EDITION,
INCLUDING AMENDMENT 1, OR A LATER
VERSION OF THE SAME STANDARD
INCORPORATING THE SAME LEVEL OF
TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
1-3
Using This Manual
Note：If the sample to be analyzed is a

capillary or prediluted sample, be sure to
uncap the tube before analysis.
Be sure to observe the following precautions when you are servicing the analyzer for the safety
of patients and operators.
 It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable installation plan. Neglect of this may result in
machine breakdown or injury of human health.
 Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
 Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached

to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.
 Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
 To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, pincher and
piercer.
 Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during normal operation, removal and maintenance.
 Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

according to government regulations.
 The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
 If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
 This product contains visible radiation or laser component. When servicing

the product, follow the instructions in this manual to avoid injury of your
eyes.
1-4
Using This Manual
 Improper servicing may damage the analyzer. Improper maintenance may

damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer strictly as instructed by the
service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the maintenance.
 For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

customer service department for maintenance advice.
 To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
 Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. Electrostatic

discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a possibility of
ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD
workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
 Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
 All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious, so take
proper protective measures for operation and maintenance.
 The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-5
2 Product Specifications
2.1 Name
 Name: Auto Hematology Analyzer
 Model: BC-5390
2.2 Configurations
2.2.1 Product Configurations
Table 2-1 Product configurations
Model BC-5390
Modes Autoloader + Closed
Languages English
System Software English

Language
Autoloader Included
External Bar-code 1 piece for closed model as

Scanner (USB Port) standard; and users may choose
to buy more if needed;
Optional for autoloading model
Internal Barcode standard

Scanner
Internet, Network Cable 1
2.2.2 PC Configuration
PC Recommended configuration: CPU Intel® 1.6GHz or above; 1G memory or above; 160GB

hard disk or above; and DVD-ROM. Minimum display resolution: 1280*1024 (standard), or
1680*1050 (wide screen); with upward compatibility, and is self-adaptive to higher resolution.
Supports Windows 8.1 Professional 64bit.
2-1
Product Specifications
2.3 Physical Properties

Table 2-2 Dimensions and weight
BC-5390 Main Unit

Dimensions Width (mm) ≤ 570
Height (mm) ≤ 525
Depth (mm) ≤ 590

Weight ≤65Kg
2.4 Environment Requirements

Table 2-3 Environment requirements
Item Working Environment Storage Environment
Ambient Temperature 15℃～30℃ -10℃～40℃
Relative Humidity 30%～85% 10%～90%
Atmospheric Pressure 70kPa～106kPa 50kPa～106kPa
2.5 Power Requirements

Table 2-4 Power supply
Item Voltage Input power Frequency
Analyzer (100V-240V～) ±10% ≤300VA (50Hz/60Hz)±1Hz
2.6 Test Panels

The analyzer provides 2 test panesl: CBC, CBC+DIFF.
2.7 Analysis Modes

The analyzer supports two types of blood samples – whole blood samples and prediluted
blood samples.
However, while the closed mode supports both whole blood and prediluted samples, the
autoloader mode only supports the whole blood samples.
2-2
2.8 Sample Requirements
2.8.1 Aspirated Blood Volume
If you are to analyze a whole blood sample under the closed mode, the analyzer will aspirate
33μL (CBC+DIFF mode) or 24μL (CBC mode) of the sample.
If you are to analyze a capillary blood sample under the closed mode, you should first
manually dilute the sample (20μL of capillary sample needs to be diluted by 180μL of diluent)
and then present the pre-diluted sample to the analyzer, which will aspirate 80μL(CBC+DIFF)
or 40μL(CBC) of the sample.
If you are to analyze a whole blood sample under autoloader mode, the analyzer will aspirate
33 μL (CBC+DIFF) or 24μL (CBC)of the sample.
2.8.2 Minimal Sample Volumes
Under both Autoloader Whole blood mode and Closed Whole blood mode, the sample volume
should be no less than 1.0ml.
2.8.3 Sample Types
Anticoagulated venous blood:

Measured under the whole blood mode, using K2EDTA or K3EDTA as anticoagulants.
Capillary blood:
Measured under the predilute and whole blood modes, using K2EDTA or K3EDTA as
anticoagulants.
2.9 Parameter
2.9.1 Parameter Classification
The BC-5390 provides the following 21 basic parameters, 3 histograms and 1 scattergram of
blood samples. It supports 2 test panels: CBC and CBC+DIFF.
Table 2-5 Parameter description
Analysis Parameter Abbreviation CBC CBC + DIFF

White Blood Cell Count WBC √ √
Neutrophil Count Neu# / √
Lymphocyte Count Lym# / √
Monocyte Count Mon# / √
Eosinophil Count Eos# / √
Basophil Count Bas# / √
2-3
Neutrophil Percent Neu% / √

Lymphocyte Percent Lym% / √
Monocyte Percent Mon% / √
Eosinophil Percent Eos% / √
Basophil Percent Bas% / √
Red Blood Cell Count RBC √ √
Hemoglobin Concentration HGB √ √
Hematocrit HCT √ √
Mean Corpuscular Volume MCV √ √
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCH √ √
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCHC
√ √
Concentration
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width RDW-CV
√ √
(Coefficient of Variation)
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width RDW-SD
√ √
(Standard Deviation)
Platelet Count PLT √ √
Mean Platelet Volume MPV √ √
Table 2-6 Histogram
Name Abbr. CBC CBC + DIFF

White Blood Cell/ Basophils WBC/BASO Histogram / √
Histogram
White Blood Cell Histogram WBC Histogram √ /
Red Blood Cell Histogram RBC Histogram √ √
Platelet Histogram PLT Histogram √ √
Table 2-7 Scattergram
Name Abbr. CBC CBC + DIFF

Differential Scattergram Diff Scattergram / √
The "√" indicates that the very parameter is provided under the mode, and the "/" indicates that
the parameter is not provided under the mode.
2.10Performance Requirements
Ensure the background test results are acceptable before verifying any other specification.
2-4
2.10.1Background Requirements
Table 2-8 Background requirements
Parameter Background Requirements

WBC ≤0.10  103 /μL
RBC ≤ 0.02 106/μL
HGB ≤ 0.1 g / dL
PLT ≤ 5  103/ μL
2.10.1.1Blank count method

Run diluent as a sample on the analyzer for 3 times continuously under the tested mode. The
highest results of the three measurements are taken as the blank count results.
2.10.2Carryover Requirements
Carryover indicates to what extent the contamination is carried over from a high-concentration
sample to a low-concentration sample.
Measurement method:
Shake and mix a high-valve sample (the parameters of which should fall into the reference
ranges) thoroughly. Run the sample continuously for 3 times and record the 3 results as i1, i2
and i3 respectively; then run a low-valve sample (diluent, and the parameters of which should
fall into the reference ranges) continuously for 3 times and record the 3 results as j1, j2 and j3
respectively. Calculate carryover by the following formula. The valves should fall into the
reference ranges listed in Table 2-7.
Table 2-9 Carryover requirements
Parameter Carryover
WBC ≤1.0％
RBC ≤1.0％
HGB ≤1.0％
HCT ≤1.0％
PLT ≤1.0％
2-5
Table 2-10 Sample concentration ranges for carryover tests
Parameter High concentration Low concentration

ranges ranges
WBC > 15.00×109/L < 3.00×109/L
RBC > 6.00×1012/L < 2.00×1012/L
HGB > 200 g/L < 40 g/L
HCT >54.0% <18.0%
PLT > 300×109/L < 100×109/L
2.10.3Repeatability requirements
Measurement method: take a sample which complies with the parameter ranges listed in Table
13, and run the sample repeatedly and continuously with regular method for 10 times. Follow
below formula to calculate the coefficient of variation (CV, %) or absolute deviation (d).
In the formula:
s ---- standard deviation of sample results;
x ---- mean valve of sample results;
xi
---- sample measurement results;
d ---- standard deviation of sample results.
Table 2-11 Repeatability requirements
Specifications of Repeatability
Parameters CV% or absolute CV% or absolute

Parameter
deviation (Di) deviation (Di)
Range
（Whole Blood）（Predilute）
≥4 3% (CV%) 5% (CV%)
WBC ( 103/μL)
1≤WBC≤2 7% (CV%) 9% (CV%)
Neu#( 103/μL) ≥1.2 8% (CV%) 10% (CV%)
Lym#( 103/μL) ≥0.6 8% (CV%) 10% (CV%)
Mon#( 103/μL) ≥0.2 20% (CV%) 30% (CV%)
Eos#( 103/μL) / 20.0% (CV%) or ±0.12 (Di) 25.0% (CV%) or±0.12 (Di)
Bas#( 103/μL) / 20.0% (CV%) or ±0.06 (Di) 25.0% (CV%) or ±0.06 (Di )
Neu%≥30
Neu% (%) 6% (CV%) 8% (CV%)
and WBC≥4
Lym%≥15
Lym% (%) 6% (CV%) 8% (CV%)
and WBC≥4
2-6
Mon%≥5
Mon% (%) 18% (CV%) 25% (CV%)
and WBC≥4
Eos% (%) WBC≥4 20.0% (CV%) or ±1.5 (Di) 25.0% (CV%) or ±1.5 (Di)
Bas% (%) WBC≥4 20.0% (CV%) or ±1.0 (Di) 25.0% (CV%) or ±1.0 (Di)
RBC ( 106/μL) / 1.5% (CV%) 2.5% (CV%)
HGB (g/dL) / 1.5% (CV%) 2% (CV%)
HCT(%) / 2% (CV%) 3% (CV%)
MCV (fL) / 1.5% (CV%) 2% (CV%)
MCH (pg) / 2% (CV%) 2.5% (CV%)
MCHC(g/dL) / 2% (CV%) 3% (CV%)
RDW-CV (%) / 2.5% (CV%) 3% (CV%)
RDW-SD (fL) / 2.5% (CV%) 3% (CV%)
20≤PLT≤50 20% (CV%) 25% (CV%)
PLT ( 103/μL)
PLT≥150 5% (CV%) 7.5% (CV%)
MPV (fL) PLT≥150 4% (CV%) 5% (CV%)
※:𝐷𝑖 = |𝑋𝑖 − 𝑚(X)|
where
Di is the absolute deviation,
Xi is the each test result,
And m(X) is the mean valve of the ten results.
Note 1: Absolute deviation (Di) is the maximum difference between each of the ten results and the mean
valve of the ten results by each parameter.
Note 2: The analysis results of predilute samples may be influenced by errors in the manual preparation
process of the samples.
2.10.4Linearity Requirements
Under both whole blood and predilute modes, prepare several samples of different
concentrations and run them sequentially. Make a linear regression equation based on the
measurement results, and calculate the slope and intercept. Use the equation to calculate the
theoretical valves. The differences between theoretical valves and measurement results
should meet the requirements as shown below.
Table 2-12 Linearity requirements
Parameter Linearity Range Specifications
0.3～100 ±0.3 or ±3％

WBC ( 103/μL)
100.01~200 ±6％
RBC ( 106/μL) 0.2～8 ±0.03 or ±3％
HGB (g/dL) 0.5～25 ±0.2 or ±2％
HCT (%) 2~75 ±1 or ±3％
2-7
5～1000 ±10 or ±5％

PLT ( 103/μL)
1001~2000 ±8％
Note: Parameter linearity requirements are expressed in both absolute error and percentage
error. The results will be deemed acceptable when either requirement is met.
2.11Applicable Tubes
2.11.1Tube specifications of the closed mode
The applicable tubes are:
 Ф12×75(mm)– 13×75(mm) (without the cap) evacuated blood collection tube, used for
Whole Blood Mode;
 Ф10.7×42mm (without the cap) small closed anticoagulated tube (No. 365974 of BD
corporation is recommended), 0.5ml, fake bottom, used for Whole Blood Mode;
 Ф11×40(mm) (1.5ml centrifugal tube) and 0.5ml centrifugal tube, used for Prediluent
Mode.
Note: the height of the evacuated blood collection tube with cap can not be higher than 83mm.
2.11.2Autoloading Tube Specifications
Ф12×75(mm)– 13×75(mm) (without the cap) evacuated blood collection tube, used for Whole
Blood Mode.
2.12Reagents, Controls and Calibrators

As the analyzer, reagents, controls, and calibrators are components of a system, performance
of the system depends on the combined integrity of all components. You should only use the
Mindray-specified reagent which are formulated specifically for the fluidic system of your
analyzer in order to provide optimal system performance. Do not use the analyzer with
reagents from multiple suppliers. In such use, the analyzer may not meet the performance
specified in this manual and may provide unreliable results. All references related to reagents
in this manual refer to the reagents specifically formulated for this analyzer.
Each reagent package must be examined before use. Product integrity may be compromised
in packages that have been damaged. Inspect the package for signs of leakage or moisture. If
there is evidence of leakage or improper handling, do not use the reagent.
2-8
NOTE
 Store and use the reagents as instructed by instructions for use of the
reagents.
 When you have changed the diluent, lyses or cleansers, run a background
to see if the results meet the requirement.
 Pay attention to the expiration dates and open-container stability days of all
the reagents. Be sure not to use expired reagents.
 After installing a new container of reagent, keep it still for a while before
use.
2.12.1Reagents
 M-53D Diluent
It provides a stable environment for counting and sizing blood cells.
 M-5 LEO(I) Lyse
It breaks down red blood cell walls and cooperates with the M-5 LEO (II) lyse to 4-differentiate
WBCs.
 M-5 LEO(II) Lyse
It cooperates with the M-5LEO (I) lyse to 4-differentiate WBCs, and dyes Eosinophils.
 M-53LH Lyse
It breaks down red blood cell walls and converts hemoglobin to a hemoglobin complex to
determine the HGB. It 2-differentiates WBCs to Basophils and other WBCs, and determines
WBC amount.
 Probe Cleanser
It is used to clean the analyzer regularly.
2.12.2Controls and Clibrators
The controls and calibrators are used to verify accurate operation of and calibrate the analyzer.
The controls are commercially prepared whole-blood products used to verify that the analyzer
is functioning properly. They are available in low, normal, and high levels. Daily use of all levels
verifies the operation of the analyzer and ensures reliable results are obtained. The calibrators
2-9
are commercially prepared whole-blood products used to calibrate the analyzer. Read and
follow the instructions for use to use the controls and calibrators.
All references related to controls and calibrators in this manual refer to the controls and
calibrators specifically formulated for this analyzer by MINDRAY. You should buy those
controls and calibrators from MINDRAY.
2-10
3 Software System
NOTE
 When handling analyzer upgrade and the service auxiliary tool, disable
Windows firewall; and enable the firewall only after you finish the
operations.
 Do not use the analyzer and DMU when you are using the service auxiliary
tool.
 In autoloader analysis process, when bi-directional LIS is on, but ACK of the
LIS is not acquired in 2 seconds (for both the analyzer and DMU), the current
sample will be skipped.
3.1 Overview
The software system is consisted of the analyzer software and the PC operation software
DMU. The main control software runs on the internal CF card inside the system, and the DMU
software could be run under the operating system. The analyzer software analyzes sequences,
collects and reads data; while the DMU saves, displays and prints results, displays analysis
and QC data, and realizes data management, parameter setup and communication.
3.2 Password Function

There are 3 levels of passwords: general user, administrator and service engineer. The
administrator can access all functions of the general user, and the service engineer can
access all functions of the administrator. User name and password of the DMU:
Level User name Password

User administrator admin admin
Service engineer service Se s700
3.3 DMU Installation Instruction
3.3.1 Installation Preparation
3.3.1.1 Recommended hardware configuration

Recommended PC configuration: CPU Intel® 1.6GHz or above; RAM: 1G or above; Hard disk:
160GB or above; with DVD-ROM. Minimum screen resolution: 1280*1024 (common display),
1680*1050 (wide display), and upward compatible with higher resolutions.
3-1
Software System
3.3.1.2 Software configuration
Operating system: supports Windows 8.1 or 10.0 Professional 64bit.

Database: SQLite.
3.3.1.3 Recommended hard disk partition
Disk C: 40G system disk for installation of operating system and DMU.
Disk D: 200G data disk store DMU data and backup data.
Disk E: 80G file disk store other files.
3.3.2 Installation
3.3.2.1 Installation of DMU Software
1. Open the installation disk, right click the file setup.exe, and select "Run as administrator" to
start installation.
Figure 3-1 Run installation program
2. The "User Account Control" dialog box displays, select "Yes" to Continue.
3. The program will then check the system environment (e.g. operating system version,
with .Net Framework 4.0 or not).
3-2
Software System
Figure 3-2 Environment checking dialog box
4. If there are modules missing for installation of the DMU, install the modules, and restart the
PC when the prompt message instructs so.
5. If all components needed by the DMU software have been installed, the next step dialog box
displays:
Figure 3-3 Next step dialog box
6. Click "Next" to enter the database path and installation path selection dialog boxes. There
are two recommendations on the selection of these paths:
A. Always save the database and backup directory into a non-system disk. As picture files shall
use large storage, it is recommended that the remaining space of the disk to save the data and
backup files shall be more than 120G;
B. If an old database already exists upon installation, and the installation program suggests a
3-3
Software System
data and backup directory, it is recommended not to change the path manually; otherwise the
old database will become inaccessible;
This interface will not display during software update process. In that case, the existing
database and backup directory will be used by default.
Figure 3-4 Selecting directory for database and backup files
7. Click "Next" to enter the component and installation directory selection dialog box. The
default installation directory is under C:\Program Files. To make sure the DMU software can
run properly, the remaining space of the installation disk shall be more than 100M.
3-4
Software System
Figure 3-5 Installation path selection dialog box
8. Click "Next", and the installation confirmation dialog box will pop up.
Figure 3-6 Confirming the installation
9. Click "Install" to start the DMU installation.
3-5
Software System
Figure 3-7 Software installation process
10. During the installation process, the print template update dialog box will be displayed.
Figure 3-8 Print template update dialog box
11. Click "Yes" to enter the print template update options dialog box.
3-6
Software System
Figure 3-9 Print template update options dialog box
12. Select an option based on actual need and update the print template. After update is
completed, the dialog box below will pop up. Click "Finish" to exit the installer and complete the
installation. Shortcut icon/item will be created on the desktop and in the application menu.
Figure 3-10 Installation finished
3-7
Software System
Figure 3-11 Shortcut icon on the desktop
Figure 3-12 Shortcut icon in the system menu
3.3.3 Update
3.3.3.1 DMU Software Update

DMU update refers to installation of higher version software on the basis of the lower version.
During the update process, database installation directory and application installation directory
selection dialog boxes will be not displayed. The functions to be completed include database
structure update, configuration file update, and print template update. During the update
process, the print template update dialog box will be displayed.
Do as follows:
1. Open the installation disk, right click the file setup.exe, and select "Run as administrator" to
start installation.
3-8
Software System
Figure 3-13 Run installation program
2. The "User Account Control" dialog box displays, select "Yes" to install the application.
3. The program will then check the system environment (e.g. operating system, with .Net
Framework 4.0 or not).
Figure 3-14 Check the system environment
4. If there are modules missing for installation of the DMU, install the modules, and restart the
PC when the prompt message instructs so.
5. If all components needed by the DMU software have been installed, the next step dialog box
displays:
3-9
Software System
Figure 3-15 Next step dialog box
6. During the DMU update process, the program will skip the database and application
installation directory selection dialog boxes, and enter the installation interface directly. Click
"Install" to start the update.
Figure 3-16 Confirming the installation
3-10
Software System
7. The remaining steps are the same as the installation steps.

The system does not support the installation of a DMU version lower than the existing one. If a
higher version already exists, below dialog box will display. Click "OK" to exit the installation.
Figure 3-17 Install a lower version of DMU
3.4 Frequently asked questions and the answers

Q: I forgot to update the print template during the installation process. How can I do that after
the installation?
A: The updating and restoring of print templates are managed by a separate program, which
will run during the DMU installation and update process. However, when the installation is
completed, the installation program will create a shortcut for this print template update tool in
the program shortcut menu. Users may perform print template update with it directly.
Q: Text fonts are obvious aliasing when running the DMU.
A: It is recommended to log in the system as an administrator and run the DMU installation
program at the administrator access level, so the DMU may have access to all necessary
system resources.
3.5 PC End Update
3.5.1 Update Preparation
First, install the DMU with the PC-end update package included in the DMU. See below for the
display name of the PC-end update package:
Figure 3-18 Analyzer software upgrade package
3-11
Software System
Unzip the PC-end update package, and extract the update.rar file into the "update"
directory:
Figure 3-19 Unzipped update package
3.5.2 Update procedure
3.5.2.1 Start the update tool
The installed DMU includes an analyzer update tool. Start the analyzer update tool as shown
below:
Figure 3-20 Analyzer update tool
Start "Analyzer Update":
3-12
Software System
Figure 3-21 Analyzer update interface
3.5.2.2 Login
Only user of service access level or above may perform analyzer update.
Figure 3-22 Login screen
3.5.2.3 Upload update files
Select the extracted "update" folder
Figure 3-23 Select update file
3-13
Software System
3.5.2.4 Perform the update
If the kernel needs to be updated, perform the update procedure twice to complete the update.
See below for the complete update procedure including kernel update.
Figure 3-24 Kernel update
After the kernel update is completed, the program will prompt to reboot the analyzer and run
the update again.
Figure 3-25 Update prompt message
Repeat above procedures and run the update again:
Figure 3-26 Update in process
3-14
Software System
When the update is complete, below dialog box will display prompt that the update will only
become effective after restarting the analyzer.
Figure 3-27 Update done
3.5.2.5 Update duration:
Complete update of the analyzer software requires 5～8 minutes.
NOTE
 Do not disconnect power of the analyzer during the update process, even if
the process bar stays still for a while, or the update may fail or the analyzer
cannot be started.
3.5.2.6 Handling update failure
Update failed and insufficient disk space is reported, check the disk space.
If the update fails, repeat the update procedure again.
Ensure the completeness of the update package; do not modify any file in the package.
3.6 Connection Setup of the DMU and Analyzer
3.6.1 Analyzer Network Setup
Install the DMU, the default analyzer IP is 10.0.0.7.

Turn on the DMU, and click "Setup" to enter the setup interface. Click "Analyzer setup" and
then "Communication".
3-15
Software System
Figure 3-28 DMU connection setup screen
To modify analyzer IP (for example, change analyzer IP to 10.0.0.6), click "Communication" to

enter the communication setup screen and input the valve of each field as below:
Figure 3-29 IP address setup
Click "Save". After restart the analyzer, the IP address will be refreshed.
3.6.2 Connection Status
Turn on the DMU, and double click the rectangle icon at the top right corner of
the screen, below analyzer connection dialog box will pop up:
3-16
Software System
Figure 3-30 Connection status icon
3.6.3 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers
Q: What do the different colors of the analyzer status icon indicate?

A:
Table 3-1 Definition of analyzer status colors
Analyzer
Definition Description
status
No matter at what state the system was,
Ready, operators
when it returns to "Ready", the system
may run the samples
may run any sample with reliable and
directly
accurate results
Waiting, when the

system has been idle
or at certain state for Including but not limit to:
a long time; follow 1. the system is standby
specific process to 2. the system is under soaking mode
enter the "Ready"
state
Error, the system is The system fails to return to the "Ready"

with error; it may only state due to component damage or
be ready after the anomalies. It must be repaired by
error is removed operators or professionals.
3-17
Software System
3.7 LIS Setup and Connection
3.7.1 LIS Communication Setup
The communication function supports unidirectional and bidirectional transmission of analyzer

data to LIS (HIS). The communication setup is done on the DMU. Scattergrams and
histograms can be transmitted in both binary and bitmap modes.
Network port communication is supported. Connection to LIS as client end or server is
supported. There are dynamic graphs or progress bars indicating communication process. To
ensure data safety, exiting from the DMU software during transmission is not allowed. If you try
to exit from the DMU, the dialog box "Transmitting, please try again later..." will pop up.
The communication setup of the DMU is as follows.
Figure 3-31 LIS connection setup screen
NOTE
 Only supports network port communication.
 If DMU as server is not selected, then the DMU serves as a client end.
 IP address: valid when DMU serves as a client end for network port
communication. When the DMU communicates as client end, fill in the IP
address of LIS server; when the DMU communicates as server, the address
is neglected.
 Port: valid for DMU network port communication. When the DMU
communicates as client end, fill in the LIS server port; when the DMU
3-18
Software System
communicates as server; fill in name of the monitoring port of the local PC.
 DMU as server: valid for network port communication; select this item, the
DMU will communicate as TCP server, or it will communicate as TCP client
end.
 Protocol Type: select protocol and coding type, "HL7+UTF8" is supported by

now.
 ACK Synchronous Comm.: this option applies to HL7 protocol in the

condition of network port communication, or this option will be neglected.
 ACK Timeout: valid if ACK synchronous communication applies; it refers to

the longest waiting interval of ACK message after the DMU sends analysis
results.
 2-Way LIS/HIS Comm.: if this option is selected, the analyzer will search for
sample information from LIS during analysis.
 Auto Comm.: if this option is selected, sample results and L-J QC results
with special sample ID will be auto transmitted to DMU.
 Transmit as Print Bitmap Data: if this option is not selected, the bitmap data
of histogram/scattergram transmitted is consistent with the screen display;
if it is selected, the bitmap data of histogram/scattergram transmitted is
consistent with the print output, with white background and the histogram
only has its profile.
 Transmit L-J QC results in sample result format: if this option is selected, L-J
QC results will be transmitted in the format of sample results (for both auto
transmission and manual transmission); if it is not selected, L-J QC results
will be transmitted in the format of QC message.
 Histogram transmission mode:
a. Not transmit, sample results do not include histogram data

b. Bitmap, sample results include histogram bitmap data
c. Data, sample results include binary raw data of the histogram.
 Scattergram Transmitted as:
a. Not transmitted, sample results do not include scattergram data

b. Bitmap, sample results include scattergram bitmap data
c. Data, sample results include binary raw data of the scattergram.
3.7.2 Unidirectional LIS communication
3.7.2.1 Function overview
1. Auto transmission of normal samples
3-19
Software System
When DMU receives analysis results of normal samples, and "Auto Comm." is selected, the
results will be auto transmitted to LIS. If transmission succeeded, the samples will be marked
as transmitted samples in the review and report screen; if failed, prompt message will be
given.
2. Auto transmission of QC samples
a. When DMU receives analysis results of QC samples, and auto transmission is on,
the results will be auto transmitted to LIS. If transmission failed, prompt message will
be given.
b. If "Transmit L-J QC results in sample result format" is selected, the L-J QC results will
be encoded as normal sample information; if it is not selected, the L-J QC results will
be encoded QC information.
c. Only L-J QC sample with special sample ID will be auto transmitted.
3. Batch transmission of samples
Batch transmission of normal sample results can be initiated from the review and report screen.
If transmission succeeded, the sample results will be marked as transmitted. If transmission
ACK error occurs, prompt message will be given; if network connection breaks off, prompt
message will be given and the batching transmission will be terminated.
4. Batch transmission of QC samples
Batch transmission of QC sample results can be initiated from the QC screen. If transmission
ACK error occurs, prompt message will be given; if network connection breaks off, prompt
message will be given and the batching transmission will be terminated.
5. QC sample transmission parameters,For L-J QC and X-B QC, only the display valve will
be transmitted.
6. Batch transmission of samples in the "Report" screen
Select samples in the "Report" screen and click the "Communication" button to transmit
the selected samples.
3-20
Software System
Figure 3-32 Batch transmission of samples in the Report screen
7. Transmission in the "Review" screen

Click the "Communication" button in the "Report" screen, a dialog box displays, and then click
"Start" to send data. If no data is selected or the date range is illegal, prompt message will be
given. During the data transmission process, the "transmitted sample" marks will be
simultaneously refreshed.
3-21
Software System
Figure 3-33 Transmission in Review screen
When the transmission begins, a progress bar will display at the bottom of the screen. To end
the transmission, click the "Cancel" button on the progress bar. See below:
Figure 3-34 Progress of transmission
8. Click the Transmit button at the QC table screen, a dialog box displays, and then click
"Start" to send data. If no data is selected or the date range is illegal, prompt message will
be given.
3-22
Software System
Figure 3-35 Transmission of samples in QC table screen
When the transmission begins, a progress bar will display at the bottom of the screen. To end
the transmission, click the "Cancel" button on the progress bar.
Figure 3-36 Transmission progress bar
3-23
Software System
3.7.2.2 Error indication
1. DMU as server
a. LIS off indication: no LIS connection, the LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
b. Error message for connection break-off during transmission: Communication
connection disconnected! The LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
2. DMU as client end
a. Connection establishment fails: LIS connection failed. The LIS icon shows
connection breaks off.
b. Error message for connection break-off during transmission: Communication
connection disconnected! The LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
c. ACK response fails: transmission continues and the message "ACK response failed!"
is given. The message bubble will keep showing. The LIS icon shows connection is
on.
3.7.3 2-way LIS Communication
3.7.3.1 Worklist of 2-way LIS

On the 2-way LIS worklist screen, only the sample ID, presentation mode, Analysis Mode and
sample position boxes can be edited. Inquiry will be sent to LIS when saving records, a
progress bar will display at the bottom of the screen, and the sample list will be locked. When
legal results are found, the progress bar will disappear, the list will be unlocked and the screen
will be refreshed. If the inquiry times out, fails or the results are illegal, the saving operation will
be canceled.
Operation procedure:
Click the "New" button to create a blank worklist. Enter the sample ID, switch the cursor or click
"Save" directly. The DMU sends inquiry to LIS:
1. If the server fails to get started, the message "Fail to start up monitoring. Please restart
the DMU software or change the communication port, and then try again." will be
displayed.
2. If the LIS function cannot be used at present, the message "No LIS/HIS connection
available!" will be displayed, and saving operation will fail.
3. The communication module completes inquiry:
a. If communication error occurs or communication times out, the message
"Communication overtime!" will be displayed.
b. If analysis mode is not obtained or illegal, the message "Analysis mode invalid" will
be displayed. If presentation mode or sample mode is obtained, the information will
be displayed on the screen, and valid patient information will be displayed too.
c. If patient information is invalid, the corresponding notification message will be
3-24
Software System
displayed. If loading mode or sample mode is obtained, the information will be

displayed on the screen, analysis mode and valid patient information will be
displayed too.
d. If information obtained is legal, and presentation mode or Analysis Mode is obtained,
the information will be displayed on the screen, analysis mode and patient
information will be displayed too.
NOTE
 The presentation mode or Analysis Mode editing can be done in the process
of the inquiry, they can be modified any time in the saving process.
3.7.3.2 Report pre-entry of 2-way LIS

The 2-way LIS function does not affect report pre-entry. Users can pre-enter information, but
when saving results, the information searched by the 2-way LIS will be used.
3.7.3.3 Analysis of 2-way LIS

1. When 2-way LIS is on, analysis with sample ID auto increment is not allowed.
2. 2-way LIS affects autoloading analysis not following the worklist (following built-in barcode
instead).
3.7.3.4 Frequently asked questions and the answers

Q: Under what circumstances will LIS connection fail?
A: When DMU sends inquiry to LIS, the message includes sample ID. LIS shall respond to the
inquiry with results (including mode and patient information) within 10s; if the respond times
out, prompt message will be given, and the saving operation or analysis flow will be
terminated.
Q: Why I cannot use the communication function?
A: Invalid or no LIS communication setup; DMU is the server and no LIS connection.
Q: Under what circumstances will the 2-way LIS inquiry fail?
A:
1) "No LIS/HIS connection available": users do not input legal connection settings, and
the communication cannot be started.
2) If the server fails to get started, the message "Fail to start up monitoring. Please
restart the DMU software or change the communication port, and then try again." will
be displayed.
3) "Analysis mode invalid": there is no Analysismode in the message received, or the
Analysis mode cannot be recognized.
4) "Communication overtime": response times out.
Q: Under what circumstances will 2-way LIS inquiry fail?
A: Invalid or abnormal data.
3-25
Software System
Data sent from LIS will be considered invalid in the following conditions:
1) Character codes cannot be recognized.

2) String length exceeds storage limit.
3) Content is not of the conventional type. For example: loading mode is not
"Autoloader" or " Closed".
For patient information, if content of a field is invalid, then the field is invalid, other patient
information fields are still valid.
Abnormal data may happen with the following situations:
1) Communication times out;

2) Invalid data;
3) Missing field;
4) Not conforming to current mode.
Abnormal situations Data entry rules of the analyzer

Missing field Default mode will be used if users do not select
Invalid data mode after starting the analyzer or before turning

Loading and on 2-way LIS. If users do select mode, the
Analysis Mode selected mode will be used. If there are samples
already analyzed, mode of the previous sample
will be used.
Missing field Default mode will be used if users do not select
Invalid data mode after starting the analyzer or before turning

on 2-way LIS. If users do select mode, the
Analysis mode
selected mode will be used. If there are samples
already analyzed, mode of the previous sample
will be used.
Patient Missing Blank

Information Invalid data Blank
3.8 Data Backup and Recovery

Applications of data backup and recovery function:
1. The function can be used to back up and recover data is case of replacing of the main
control board, or the DMU-installed PC.
2. The function cannot be used to recover data after the replacement of drive boards,
autoloader boards, analog boards, signal boards or the power panels.
3-26
4 Introduction of Major Parameters
4.1 Parameter Sources

The analyzer measures and outputs 21 parameters, 3 histograms and 1 scattergram of blood
samples,These includ white blood cells (WBC), red blood cells (RBC), platelet (PLT),
hemoglobin (HGB), and so on. For full information please check the table below.
Table 4-1 Parameters,histograms and scattergram
Groups Parameter or Histograme Name Abbreviation

WBC group White Blood Cell Count WBC
（11） Neutrophil Count Neu#
Lymphocyte Count Lym#
Monocyte Count Mon#
Eosinophil Count Eos#
Basophil Count Bas#
Neutrophil Percent Neu%
Lymphocyte Percent Lym%
Monocyte Percent Mon%
Eosinophil Percent Eos%
Basophil Percent Bas%
RBC group Red Blood Cell Count RBC
（8） Hemoglobin Concentration HGB
Hematocrit HCT
Mean Corpuscular Volume MCV
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCH
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration MCHC
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width (Coefficient of
RDW-CV
Variation)
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width (Standard
RDW-SD
Deviation)
PLT group Platelet Count PLT
（2） Mean Platelet Volume MPV
Histograms WBC/BASO
White Blood Cell/ Basophils Histogram (CBC+DIFF)
Histogram
(3) White Blood Cell Histogram (CBC) WBC Histogram
Red Blood Cell Histogram RBC Histogram
Platelet Histogram PLT Histogram
Scattergram
Differential Scattergram Diff Scattergram
(1)
4-1
Introduction of Major Parameters
4.2 WBC Measurement
4.2.1 Flow Cytometry by Laser
Figure 4-1 WBC Measurement
After a predetermined volume of blood is aspirated and diluted by a certain amount of reagent,
it is injected into the flow cell. Surrounded with sheath fluid (diluent), the blood cells pass
through the center of the flow cell in a single column at a faster speed. When the blood cells
suspended in the diluent pass through the flow cell, they are exposed to a laser beam. The
intensity of scatter light reflects the blood cell size and intracellular density. The low-angle
scattered light reflects cell size, and the high-angle scattered light reflects intracellular density
(nucleus size and density). The optical detector receives this scatter light and converts it into
electrical pulses. Pulse data collected can be used to draw a 2-dimensional distribution
(scattergram). As shown in Figure 4-1, X-axis represents the intracellular density and Y-axis
the blood cell size. Various types of analysis data can then be obtained from the scattergrams.
Figure 4-2 DIFF channel scattergram
4-2
By analyzing the DIFF channel scattergram, the analyzer presents the Lym%, Mon%, Eos%
and Neu%.
4.2.2 Electrical Impedance Method
WBCs/BASs are counted and sized by the Electrical Impedance method. This method is
based on the measurement of changes in electrical resistance produced by a particle, which in
this case is a blood cell, suspended in a conductive diluent as it passes through an aperture of
known dimensions. An electrode is submerged in the liquid on both sides of the aperture to
create an electrical pathway. As each particle passes through the aperture, a transitory change
in the resistance between the electrodes is produced. This change produces a measurable
electrical pulse. The number of pulses generated signals the number of particles that passed
through the aperture. The amplitude of each pulse is proportional to the volume of each
particle.
Figure 4-3 Metering diagram

Each pulse is amplified and compared to the internal reference voltage channel, which only
accepts the pulses of a certain amplitude. If the pulse generated is above the WBC/BAS lower
threshold, it is counted as a WBC/BAS. The analyzer presents the WBC/BAS histogram,
whose x-coordinate represents the cell volume (fL) and y-coordinate represents the number of
the cells.
4.2.3 Derivation of WBC-Related Parameters
Based on the analysis of the DIFF channel scattergram and the Lym region, Neu region, Mon
region and Eos region, the analyzer calculates the Lym%, Mon%, Eos% and Neu%. Having
achieved the WBC count, the analyzer proceeds to calculate Lym#, Neu#, Mon# and Eos# per
the following equations while Bas# is obtained directly by the Electrical Impedance method
and express them in 103/uL.
4-3
4.3 HGB Measurement
4.3.1 Colorimetric Method
HGB is determined by the colorimetric method. The WBC/HGB dilution is delivered to the
HGB bath where it is bubble mixed with a certain amount of lyse, which converts
hemoglobin to a hemoglobin complex that is measurable at 530nm -535 nm. An LED is
mounted on one side of the bath and emits a beam of monochromatic light, which passes
through the sample and is then measured by an optical sensor that is mounted on the
opposite side. The signal is then amplified and the voltage is measured and compared to
the blank reference reading (readings taken when there is only diluent in the bath), and
the HGB is measured and calculated in the analyzer automatically.
4.3.2 HGB Parameters
The HGB is calculated per the following equation and expressed in g/dL.
 Blank Photocurrent 
HGB(g/dL)  Constant  Ln  
 Sample Photocurrent 
4.4 RBC/PLT Measurement
4.4.1 Electrical Impedance Method
RBCs/PLTs are counted and sized by the Electrical Impedance method. This method is based
on the measurement of changes in electrical resistance produced by a particle, which in this
case is a blood cell, suspended in a conductive diluent as it passes through an aperture of
known dimensions. An electrode is submerged in the liquid on both sides of the aperture to
create an electrical pathway. As each particle passes through the aperture, a transitory change
in the resistance between the electrodes is produced. This change produces a measurable
electrical pulse. The number of pulses generated signals the number of particles that passed
through the aperture. The amplitude of each pulse is proportional to the volume of each
particle.
Each pulse is amplified and compared to the internal reference voltage channel, which only
accepts the pulses of a certain amplitude. If the pulse generated is above the RBC/PLT lower
threshold, it is counted as a RBC/PLT. The analyzer presents the RBC/PLT histogram, whose
x-coordinate represents the cell volume(fL)and y-coordinate represents the number of the cells.
4-4
5 Instrument Warning Messages
5.1 Error code
5.1.1 Pressure Detection
Table 5-1 Pressure dectection
Error ID Error Name Error Mechanism Troubleshooting/Solution

Pressure 1. Check if the cables connecting
The generated
chamber drive board and main control
0x01000601 pressure is out of
pressure out of board, as well as the cables
preset pressure range
control connecting main control board
Vacuum and the analog board are properly
The generated
chamber connected, and the rubber pipes
0x01000602 pressure is out of
pressure control connecting the pressure detectors
preset pressure range
fails on the analog board are firmly
Pressure connected;
Pressure out of the
chamber 2. Check if the vacuum chamber
0x01000605 preset range of
pressure out of and pressure chamber are
pressure detection
preset range properly installed;
3. Click the "Clear error" button or
perform self-test under the
"Self-Test" screen to check if the
analyzer works OK, and if the
error is removed;
Vacuum
Pressure out of the 4. Restart the analyzer to see if it
chamber
0x01000606 preset range of works OK;
pressure out of
pressure detection 5. Double check if all the valves
preset range
and pumps work properly.
6. If the problem still remains after
all above solutions, then the
pressure detector may have
failed. Replace the analog board.
1. Click the “Remove” button to
remove this error.
Liquid pressure Liquid pressure out of
0x01002040 2. If the error still exists, contact
out of range range
our Customer Service
Department.
5-1
Instrument Warning Messages
5.1.2 Temperature Module
Table 5-2 Temperature module

1. First check if the drive board
MCU and FPGA versions are
correct;
2. Check if the reaction bath
temperature falls in the range of
[34.5, 31.5]℃;
If the temperature is 0℃, then
the photocoupler input end is
fused; possible reasons may
include sensor being damaged
or wires being fused;
If the temperature is 70℃, check
Reaction bath
Reaction bath if it is the actual temperature:
temperature does not
0x01003030 temperature A. If yes, replace the drive board
meet sequence
error B. If not, then the sensor input
design requirement.
end is open-circuited; possible
reasons may include senor being
damaged, or the wires connector
are not properly connected
3. If the temperature is still lower
than the lower limit, identify the
corresponding heat lamp. If the
heat lamp stays on, check if the
heater wires are well connected.
If the heat lamp is off, then the
heater is damaged. Replace the
heater.
correct;
Environment 2. Check if the analyzer
Environment
temperature is temperature falls in the range of
temperature is out of
0x1003031 out of operating [15,30]℃;
operating
temperature 3. Check if the temperature
temperature range
range detector cables are well
connected;
4. Replace the temperature
detector cables.
0x1003032 Environment Environment 1. First check if the drive board
5-2
temperature is temperature is out of MCU and FPGA versions are

out of running running temperature correct;
temperature range 2. Check if the analyzer
range temperature falls in the range of
[10,40]℃;
or wires being fused;
if it is the actual temperature:
A. If yes, replace the drive board
B. If not, then the sensor input
3. Check if the temperature
detector cables are well
connected;
4. Check if the heater and heater
wires are working properly;
5. Replace the temperature
detector cables.
correct;
2. Check if the optical system
temperature falls in the range of
[30,40]℃;
Laser diode
Laser diode fused; possible reasons may
temperature is out of
0x01003033 temperature is include sensor being damaged
running temperature
out of range or wires being fused;
range
5-3

heater.
correct;
2. When the environment
temperature is lower than 36℃,
check if the diluent temperature
falls in the range of [25,36]℃;
When the environment
temperature is higher than 36℃,
check if the diluent temperature
falls in the range of [25,33]℃;
Diluent
Diluent temperature or wires being fused;
0x0100041D temperature out
is out of range If the temperature is 70℃, check
of range
heater.
5-4
5.1.3 Syringe Module
 Possible error on user end
Table 5-3

1. Photocouplers are Photocoupler error or
still blocked when the excessive motor assembly
syringe is out of the resistance which leads to
detection area after step loss or operation
initialization; obstruction.
2. Photocouplers are Low possibility of
not blocked when the occurrence.
syringe is inside 1. Check if the software
Sampling syringe
0x01000301 photocoupler version and hardware
photocoupler error
detection area after version are correct, and
initialization; whether the 24V, 12V and
3. Syringe should not 5V power are proper;
be at the home 2. Check if the cables of the
position after photocouplers and motors
resetting, but the are well connected and
photocouplers are make sure there is no bad
blocked. connection;
Photocouplers not 3. Click "Remove Error" to
Sampling syringe blocked when the see if the error can be
0x01000302 aspiration/dispensation syringe is supposed removed;
action failure 1 to be at the home 4. Perform self-test at the
position "Self-Test" screen, and see if
Home position the error can be removed;
photocouplers are 5. When the motor is
Sampling syringe
blocked when the operating, check if the LED
0x01000303 aspiration/dispensation
syringe is supposed indicator of the
action failure 2
to be out of the home corresponding channel
position (ASP-M3_LED2;
When the syringe SP-M4_LED2,
starts moving, it is SH-M5_LED2,
Sample syringe
supposed to arrive at DIL-M6_LED2,
the home position, LYSE-M7_LED2) is
action not allowed 1
but the photocouplers flickering. If not, replace the
are not blocked; driver board;
When the syringe 6. Check if the
Sample syringe
starts moving, it is photocouplers are OK: see if
0x01000305 aspiration/dispensatio
supposed to be out of the they are in different
n action not allowed 2
the home position, states when blocked and not
5-5
but the photocoupler blocked;

is blocked; 7. Find the photocoupler with
1. Photocouplers are error and remove it. Check if
still blocked when the there is dust or splashed
syringe is out of the fluid covering the glittering
detection area after side;
initialization; 8. Wipe the photocoupler
2. Photocouplers are and mount it back to see
not blocked when the whether the error can be
Sample injection syringe is inside removed. If not, replace with
0x01000311 syringe photocoupler photocoupler a new one;
error detection area after 9. Check if the syringe
initialization; assembly is well installed;
3. Syringe should not 10. If the error still exists,
be at the home replace the corresponding
position after syringe assembly with a new
resetting, but the one.
photocouplers are
blocked.
Photocouplers not
Sample injection
blocked when the
syringe
0x01000312 syringe is supposed
aspiration/dispensatio
to be at the home
n action failure 1
position
Home position
Sample injection photocouplers are
syringe blocked when the
0x01000313
aspiration/dispensation syringe is supposed
action failure 2 to be out of the home
position
Photocouplers not
Sample injection
blocked when the
syringe
0x01000314 syringe is supposed
aspiration/dispensation
to be at the home
position
Home position
Sample injection photocouplers are
syringe blocked when the
0x01000315
aspiration/dispensation syringe is supposed
action not allowed 2 to be out of the home
position
1. Photocouplers are
Sheath fluid syringe
0x01000321 still blocked when the
photocoupler error
syringe is out of the
5-6
detection area after

initialization;
not blocked when the
syringe is inside
photocoupler
initialization;
3. Syringe should not
be at the home
position after
resetting, but the
photocouplers are
blocked.
Photocouplers not
Sheath fluid syringe blocked when the
0x01000322 aspiration/dispensation syringe is supposed
action failure 1 to be at the home
position
Home position
photocouplers are
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
action failure 2
to be out of the home
position
Photocouplers not
Sheath fluid syringe blocked when the
action not allowed 1 to be at the home
position
Home position
photocouplers are
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
position
still blocked when the
Lyse syringe detection area after
0x01000331
photocoupler error initialization;
not blocked when the
syringe is inside
5-7
photocoupler
initialization;
be at the home
position after
resetting, but the
photocouplers are
blocked.
Photocouplers not
Lyse syringe blocked when the
position
Home position
photocouplers are
Lyse syringe
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
n action failure 2
position
Photocouplers not
Lyse syringe blocked when the
position
Home position
photocouplers are
Lyse syringe
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
n action not allowed 2
position
initialization;
Diluent syringe
0x01000341 not blocked when the
photocoupler error
syringe is inside
photocoupler
initialization;
be at the home
5-8
position after
resetting, but the
photocouplers are
blocked.
Photocouplers not
Diluent syringe blocked when the
position
Home position
photocouplers are
Diluent syringe
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
action failure 2
position
Photocouplers not
Diluent syringe blocked when the
position
Home position
photocouplers are
Diluent syringe
blocked when the
syringe is supposed
position
 Very low possibility of occurrence on user end
Table 5-4

1. Time conflict These kinds of errors mainly
between different happen at the R&D debug
Sampling
actions; stage. If they occurred on
0x01000300 syringe is in
2. Software command user end, it is most probably
action
is given at a wrong because of conflict between
time. action times or commands.
1. Time conflict Click "Remove Error" to see if
between different the error can be removed. If
Sample injection
actions; not, restart the analyzer. No
0x01000310 syringe is in
2. Software command special treatment is needed.
action
is given at a wrong
time.
0x01000320 Sheath fluid 1. Time conflict
5-9
syringe is in between different

action actions;
2. Software command
is given at a wrong
time.
1. Time conflict
between different
Lyse syringe is actions;
0x01000330
in action 2. Software command
is given at a wrong
time.
1. Time conflict
between different
Diluent syringe actions;
0x01000340
is in action 2. Software command
is given at a wrong
time.
Syringe aspirate
volume designed in
sequence is above
Sampling limit;
syringe aspirate Occur in the R&D
0x01000306
volume over stage;
range If the error occurs on
user end, then there is
software or program
bugs.
Syringe dispense
volume designed in
sequence is above
Sampling
limit;
syringe
Occur in the R&D
0x01000307 dispense
stage;
volume over
If the error occurs on
range
software or program
bugs.
Sampling If the error occurs on
0x01000308 syringe action user end, then there is
overtime a software bug
Sample injection Syringe aspirate
syringe aspirate volume designed in
0x01000316
volume over sequence is above
range limit;
5-10
Occur in the R&D

stage;
software or program
bugs.
Syringe dispense
volume designed in
sequence is above
Sample injection
limit;
syringe
Occur in the R&D
0x01000317 dispense
stage;
volume over
range
software or program
bugs.
Sample injection If the error occurs on
Syringe aspirate
volume designed in
sequence is above
Sheath fluid limit;
syringe aspirate Occur in the R&D
0x01000318
volume out of stage;
software or program
bugs.
Syringe dispense
volume designed in
sequence is above
Sheath fluid
limit;
syringe
Occur in the R&D
0x01000327 dispense
stage;
volume out of
range
software or program
bugs.
Sheath fluid If the error occurs on
Lyse syringe Syringe aspirate
0x01000336
aspirate volume volume designed in
5-11
out of range sequence is above

limit;
Occur in the R&D
stage;
software or program
bugs.
Syringe dispense
volume designed in
sequence is above
Lyse syringe limit;
dispense Occur in the R&D
0x01000337
software or program
bugs.
Lyse syringe
0x01000338 user end, then there is
action overtime
a software bug
Syringe aspirate
volume designed in
sequence is above
limit;
Diluent syringe
Occur in the R&D
0x01000346 aspirate volume
stage;
out of range
software or program
bugs.
Syringe dispense
volume designed in
sequence is above
Diluent syringe limit;
dispense Occur in the R&D
0x01000347
software or program
bugs.
Diluent syringe
0x01000348 user end, then there is
action overtime
a software bug
5-12
5.1.4 Sampling Assembly Module
Table 5-5

If the X motor does 1. Check if all software and
not reach the target hardware versions are
position in horizontal correct, and whether the 24V,
direction, then the 12V and 5V power are
horizontal motor proper;
action fails or there 2. Before troubleshooting,
are photocoupler make sure all cables of the
errors. Possible related parts are properly
causes include: connected, e.g. check if the
1. Position cables inside the sampling
X motor failed to photocoupler cables assembly are well connected,
0x01000201 move to target or horizontal if the photocoupler cables
position photocoupler cables are connected to the correct
are damaged; positions according to the
2. Position labels, whether the motor
photocouplers fail; cables are connected to the
3. Horizontal motor correct positions according to
fails; the labels.
4. Circuit error; 3. Click "Remove Error" to
5. Sampling assembly see if the error can be
encounters increasing removed;
resistance in 4. Perform X or Y motor
horizontal direction self-test at the "Self-Test"
Horizontal home screen, and see if the error
position can be removed;
photocouplers are not 5. When the motor is
blocked while the operating, check if the LED
motor should have indicator of the corresponding
already returned to channel
X motor failed to
the home position in (X-M1_LED2;Y-M2_LED2) is
return to the
the horizontal flickering. If not, replace the
0x01000202 home position
direction. This means driver board;
after
the horizontal motor 6. Check if the photocouplers
initialization
fails to move to target are OK: see if the two
position or there are photocouplers in the X
photocoupler errors. direction and the one in the Y
Possible causes direction are in different
include: states when blocked and not
1. Horizontal blocked;
5-13
photocoupler cables 7. Find the photocoupler with

or horizontal motor error and remove it. Check if
cables are damaged; there is dust or splashed fluid
2. Horizontal covering the glittering side;
photocouplers fail; 8. Wipe the photocoupler and
3. Horizontal motor mount it back to see whether
fails; the error can be removed. If
4. Circuit error; not, replace with a new one;
5. Sampling assembly 9. If the error still exists,
encounters increasing check the motor to see if it
resistance in does not reach the
horizontal direction photocoupler position
The photocouplers because of step loss or
are still at the home operation obstruction (less
X motor failed to
position. This means likely to happen).
leave the home
0x01000203 the horizontal motor
position after
fails to move to target
initialization
position or there are
photocoupler errors.
Adjusting X Same error with
motor to the 0x201. Only it appears
0x01000204
target position in the position
failed adjusting progress.
If the Y motor does
not reach the target
position in vertical
direction, then the
vertical motor action
fails or there are
Possible causes
include:
Y motor failed to 1. Position
0x01000211 move the target photocoupler cables
position or vertical
photocoupler cables
are damaged;
2. Position
photocouplers fail;
3. Vertical motor fails;
4. Circuit error;
5. Sampling assembly
encounters increasing
resistance in vertical
5-14
direction
Home position
photocouplers are not
blocked while the
motor should have
already returned to
the home position.
This means the
vertical motor fails to
move to target
Y motor failed to Possible causes
move to the include:
0x01000212 upper position 1. Position
after photocoupler cables
initialization or vertical
photocoupler cables
are damaged;
2. Vertical home
position
photocouplers fail;
3. Vertical motor fails;
4. Circuit error;
direction
Home position
photocouplers are still
blocked, while the
motor should have
already left the home
position. This means
Y motor failed to
the vertical motor fails
move to the
to move to target
0x01000213 lower position
after
initialization
Possible causes
include:
1. Position
photocoupler cables
or vertical
photocoupler cables
5-15
are damaged;
2. Position
photocouplers fail;
3. Horizontal motor
fails;
4. Circuit error;
direction
Same error with
Adjusting Y 0x211, only it appears
motor to the in the position
0x01000214
target position adjusting progress.
failed Can be combined with
0x211.
Adjusting Y
0x01000215 motor to upper Can be combined with
position failed 0x212
The error will be
reported if the
horizontal motor starts
action while:
1. The position
X motor action
0x01000223 photocouplers are
not allowed
blocked
2. The vertical home
position
blocked.
The error will be
reported if the vertical
X motor action motor starts action
0x01000226
not allowed while the position
photocouplers are
blocked.
If the motor is clogged
or loses steps while
Y motor failed to piercing, then the
0x01000228 pierce to lower error will be reported
position when the sample
probe returns to the
upper position.
0x01000231 Horizontal home The horizontal home
5-16
position position
photocoupler photocouplers are not
error blocked while the
motor should have
already returned to
the home position.
The vertical home
position
Sample probe photocouplers are not
upper blocked while the
0x01000235
photocoupler sample probe should
error have already returned
to the vertical home
position.
Table 5-6

1. The error only appears in
the position adjusting
progress;
2. Check if the fixture,
The adjusting steps in adjusting process or the
the vertical position target position is correct;
Y motor adjusting
0x01000218 exceed limit. 3. If all above are correct,
steps out of limit
Re-adjustment is check if the sampling
required. assembly is correctly
assembled;
4. If there is no problem
with that either, replace the
sampling assembly.
1. The error only appears in
the position adjusting
progress;
2. Check if the adjusting
The adjusting steps in process or the target
the horizontal position position is correct;
X motor adjusting
0x01000208 exceed limit. 3. If both above are correct,
steps out of limit
Re-adjustment is check if the sampling
required. assembly is correctly
assembled;
4. If there is no problem
with that either, replace the
sampling assembly.
0x01000282 RBC position notch Border is too close to 1. The error are only
5-17
right border the corresponding reported when the user is

overruns position notch of the leaving the screen after the
RBC position notch photocoupler position adjustment;
0x01000272
left border overruns 2. If flags 272-274, 77-278
WBC position notch and 27E are reported,
0x01000273 right border check the assembling of
overruns sampling assembly. If there
WBC position notch is no error with the
0x0100027E
left border overruns assembling, replace the
DIFF position notch sampling assembly;
0x01000275 right border 3. If other errors are
overruns reported, re-adjust to target
DIFF position notch position;
0x01000278
left border overruns 4. If there are still error
Autoloading position flags, check if the
0x01000279 notch right border adjustment process and the
overruns target position are correct;
Autoloading position 5. If both above are correct,
0x01000276 notch left border check if the sampling
overruns assembly is correctly
Closed position assembled;
0x0100027B notch right border 6. If there is no problem
overruns with that either, replace the
Closed position sampling assembly.

0x01000280 notch left border
overruns
The error is reported
when the adjusting
command is not sent Click "Remove Error" to
Y motor adjusting
0x01000217 from position 0 to 6. remove the error; if failed,
position error
The error is not restart analyzer
supposed to appear
on user end
Received confusing
position adjusting Click "Remove Error" to
Y motor adjusting
0x01000219 commands. It is remove the error; if failed,
end position error
software error. restart analyzer
Restart the software.
The error is reported
when the adjusting
Click "Remove Error" to
X motor adjusting command is not sent
0x01000207 remove the error; if failed,
position error from position 0 to 9.
restart analyzer
The error is not
supposed to appear
5-18
on user end
Received confusing
position adjusting Click "Remove Error" to
X motor adjusting
0x01000209 commands. It is remove the error; if failed,
end position error
software error. restart analyzer
Restart the software.
1. Time conflict
between different
actions; The error seldom appears.
Sample probe is
0x01000220 2. Software command Click "Remove Error" to
working
is given at a wrong remove it directly.
time;
3. Driver timing error.
Sample probe If the error occurs on Click "Remove Error" to
0x01000221 adjustment user end, then there remove the error; if failed,
forbidden is a software bug restart analyzer
If the error occurs on Click "Remove Error" to
X motor action
0x01000222 user end, then there remove the error; if failed,
overtime
is a software bug restart analyzer
If the error occurs on Click "Remove Error" to
Y motor action
0x01000225 user end, then there remove the error; if failed,
overtime
is a software bug restart analyzer
5.1.5 Boards Integrating Module
Table 5-7

24V voltage Out of preset range Abnormal electrical circuit status. Low
0x010030A3
abnormal [22,30]V possibility of occurrence.
1. First check if versions are correct;
2. Check if the cables connecting
power board and various circuit boards
are well connected;
12V voltage Out of preset range 3. Check if the corresponding power
0x010030A4
abnormal [11.4,12.6]V output end is OK; if the output power is
out of range, replace the power supply;
3. Remove error;
4. If the error is not removed, replace
the drive board.
5-19
5.1.6 Analog Board
Table 5-8

+12V analog Abnormal electrical circuit
Out of preset range
0x010030A1 voltage status. Low possibility of
[11.4,12.6]V
abnormal occurrence.
1. First check if versions are
correct;
2. Check if the cables
connecting power board and
various circuit boards are well
connected;
-12V analog 3. Check if the corresponding
Out of preset range
0x010030A2 voltage power output end is OK; if the
[-12.6,-11.4]V
abnormal output power is out of range,
replace the power supply;
3. Click "Remove Error" to
see if the error can be
removed;
4. If the error is not removed,
replace the analog board.
1. First check if the FPGA
versions of CPU and main
control board are correct;
2. Check the cables to analog
board J8 are well connected;
3. Unplug the cable connector
from analog board J8;
4. Measure the voltage at
The monitored TP48 with a multimeter. If it is
56V voltage
0x010030A0 voltage does not meet out of range 1.206V~1.474V,
abnormal
design requirement replace the analog board;
5. If the voltage is within the
range, replace J8 cables
(C-009-002228-00). Connect
to J8, and click "Remove
Error" to remove the error;
6. If the error is not removed,
replace the main control
board.
Laser diode The laser diode 1. First check if the FPGA
0x01003061
current current is found not versions of CPU and main
5-20
meeting the design control board are correct;

requirements during 2. Check if all the cables are
HGB measurement properly connected, or the
cables are scratched or
damaged. The cables
include:
C-009-002226-00 optical
system control line
C-009-002228-00 main
control board low-speed
analog line
C-009-002229-00 main
control analog board digital
line
3. Check if the analog board
is working properly:
a. Test whether the voltage at
TP32 on the analog board is
lower than 0.1V; if yes, then
the analog board is with error
b. Check the voltages at J1.1
([-12.6,-11.4]V) and J1.4
([11.4,12.6]V) to see whether
power supply to laser control
board is correct; if they are
out of range, replace cable
C-009-002226-00. If the error
still remains after replacing
the cable, then the analog
board is with error. Replace
the analog board
4. Check if the laser control
board works properly:
a. Test the TPILD voltage to
see if it falls into the range of
1.2V~4.5V; if not, replace the
laser control board. Test the
point again. If the voltage is
still out of range, then the
optical system is with error.
Replace it accordingly
b. Test points J1.6 (5V) and
J1.5 (<0.8V) to see whether
the laser control board switch
5-21
control works properly. If the

voltages of the two points are
out of the indicated range,
replace the laser control. Test
the points again. If the
voltages are still out of range,
then the optical system is with
error. Replace it accordingly.
5. Check if the main control
board works properly:
a. Test if the P8.9 voltage on
the analog board is the same
with the TPILD voltage on the
laser control board. If they are
the same, replace the cable
C-009-002228-00. If the error
still remains, then the main
control board is with error.
Replace the main control
board. If the voltages at the
two points are not the same,
replace cable
C-009-002226-00
b. Replace cable
C-009-002229-00. If the error
still remains, then the main
control board is with error.
Replace the main control
board.
1. Check if the right side door
is actually open. If yes, close
the door to remove the error;
2. If the error is reported while
the door is closed, check if
the micro-switch can be
readily pressed down when
0x010030D0 Side door open Right side door open the door is closed.
3. Check if the wires to the
micro-switch are properly
connected and if they are
damaged;
4. Check if the micro-switch
works properly by pressing
down and then releasing the
5-22
switch;
5. If the error still remains,
replace the photocouplers.
1. Check if the optical
assembly is properly secured.
If the door is open, close the
door to remove the error;
2. If the error is reported while
the door is closed, check if
the micro-switch can be
readily pressed down when
Optical the door is closed.
Optical assembly
0x010030D1 assembly cover 3. Check if the wires to the
cover are loose
open micro-switch are properly
connected and if they are
damaged;
4. Check if the micro-switch
works properly by pressing
down and then releasing the
switch;
replace the micro-switch.
5.1.7 Autoloading Mechanism
 Motor module
Table 5-9

1. Check if the software,
sequence and autoloading
Mix Mechanism Software versions are correct;
0x01005201
is working command is delayed 2. Click "Remove Error;"
3. Restart the software and
the analyzer
The home position 1. Check if all software
photocouplers are versions are correct;
Mix mechanism blocked when the 2. Before troubleshooting,
X direction motor is not supposed make sure all cables of the
0x01005202
motor action to be at the home related parts are properly
failed1 position; SMXM home connected, e.g. check if the
position photocoupler cables connecting motor
or motor error and photocoupler are
5-23
The home position properly connected, if the

photocouplers are not photocoupler or motor
Mix mechanism blocked when the cables are accordingly
X direction motor is supposed to connected to labeled
0x01005203
motor action be at the home positions;
failed2 position; SMXM home 3. Click "Remove Error" to
position photocoupler see if the error can be
or motor error removed;
Z direction or R 4. Perform mixing
Z direction or R
direction motor mechanism self-test at the
0x01005204 direction motor is not
is not at home "Self-Test" screen, and see
at home position
position if the error can be
End position removed;
photocouplers are 5. Check if the
Mix mechanism blocked when the photocouplers are OK: see
X direction motor is not supposed if the they are in different
0x01005207
motor action to be at the end states when blocked and
failed1 position; SMXM end not blocked;
position photocoupler 6. For photocoupler error,
or motor error find the photocoupler with
error and remove it. Check
if there is dust or splashed
fluid covering the glittering
side;
The end position 7 Wipe the photocoupler
photocouplers are not and mount it back to see if
Mix mechanism blocked when the the error can be removed.
X direction motor is supposed to If not, replace with a new
0x01005208
motor action be at the end position; one;
failed2 SMRM end position 8. If the error still exists,
photocoupler or motor check the motor to see if it
error does not reach the
photocoupler position
because of step loss or
operation obstruction (less
likely to happen).
1. Before troubleshooting,
make sure all cables of the
The mix mechanism X
Mix mechanism related parts are properly
direction home and
X direction connected, e.g. check if the
0x01005209 end photocouplers are
photocoupler photocoupler cables are
blocked at the same
error properly and accordingly
time
connected to the labeled
positions;
5-24
2. Check if there is any

obstacle blocking the two
photocouplers;
removed;
4. Perform mixing
mechanism self-test at the
"Self-Test" screen, and see
if the error can be
removed;
5. Check if the
photocouplers are OK: see
if the they are in different
states when blocked and
not blocked;
6. For photocoupler error,
find the photocoupler with
error and remove it. Check
if there is dust or splashed
side;
7. Wipe the photocoupler
and mount it back to see if
the error can be removed.
If not, replace with a new
one.
 Mix mechanism Z direction
Table 5-10

Mix Mechanism Software command is versions are correct;
0x01005401
is working delayed 2. Click "Remove Error;"
the analyzer
Mix mechanism
blocked when the 2. Before troubleshooting,
Z direction
0x01005402 motor is not supposed make sure all cables of the
motor action
to be at the home related parts are properly
failed1
position; SMZM home connected, e.g. check if the
5-25

Mix mechanism blocked when the cables are accordingly
Z direction motor is supposed to connected to labeled
0x01005403
motor action be at the home positions;
failed2 position; SMzM home 3. Click "Remove Error" to
X-direction motor is 4. Perform mixing
Mixing motor Z not at the end position mechanism self-test at the
direction motor or mix motor not at the "Self-Test" screen, and see
0x01005404
current action home position, so the if the error can be removed;
forbidden SMZM action is 5. Check if the
forbidden photocouplers are OK: see
End position if the they are in different
photocouplers are states when blocked and
Mix mechanism blocked when the not blocked;
Z direction motor is not supposed 6. For photocoupler error,
0x01005407
motor action to be at the end find the photocoupler with
failed1 position; SMZM end error and remove it. Check if
position photocoupler there is dust or splashed
or motor error fluid covering the glittering
side;
7 Wipe the photocoupler
The end position and mount it back to see if
photocouplers are not the error can be removed. If
Mix mechanism blocked when the not, replace with a new one;
Z direction motor is supposed to 8. If the error still exists,
0x01005408
motor action be at the end position; check the motor to see if it
failed2 SMZM end position does not reach the
photocoupler or motor photocoupler position
error because of step loss or
likely to happen).
The mix mechanism Y
related parts are properly
Mix mechanism direction home and
connected, e.g. check if the
Z direction end position
0x01005409 photocoupler cables are
photocoupler photocouplers are
properly and accordingly
error blocked at the same
time
positions;
2. Check if there is any
5-26
obstacle blocking the two

photocouplers;
removed;
4. Perform mixing
if the error can be removed;
5. Check if the
not blocked;
error and remove it. Check if
there is dust or splashed
side;
the error can be removed. If
not, replace with a new one.
 Mix mechanism rotates
Table 5-11

1. Check if both the
Z-direction motor and
Z-direction motor not
X-direction motor are at the
at the end position or
Mixing motor end position;
X-direction motor not
0x01005500 current action 2. Check if the Z-direction
at the end position, so
not allowed motor, X-direction motor,
the action is not
and all cables connected to
allowed
them are OK;
3. Click "Remove Error"
Mixing motor in Software command is versions are correct;
0x01005501
action delayed 2. Click "Remove Error;"
the analyzer
5-27

blocked when the 2. Before troubleshooting,
Mixing motor motor is not supposed make sure all cables of the
0x01005502
action error to be at the home related parts are properly
position; SMRM home connected, e.g. check if the
blocked when the cables are accordingly
Mixing motor motor is supposed to connected to labeled
0x01005503
action error be at the home positions;
position; SMRM home 3. Click "Remove Error" to
X-direction motor not 4. Perform mixing
at the end position or mechanism self-test at the
Mixing motor
Z-direction motor not "Self-Test" screen, and see
0x01005504 action not
at the end position, so if the error can be removed;
allowed
the action is not 5. Check if the
allowed photocouplers are OK: see
End position if the they are in different
Motor not blocked when the not blocked;
supposed to be motor is not supposed 6. For photocoupler error,
0x01005507
at the end to be at the end find the photocoupler with
position position; SMRM end error and remove it. Check if
position photocoupler there is dust or splashed
or motor error fluid covering the glittering
side;
The end position and mount it back to see if
photocouplers are not the error can be removed. If
blocked when the not, replace with a new one;
Motor supposed
motor is supposed to 8. If the error still exists,
0x01005508 to be at the end
be at the end position; check the motor to see if it
position
SMRM end position does not reach the
photocoupler or motor photocoupler position
error because of step loss or
likely to happen).
Mixing Current 1. Check if all software
0x01005606
mechanism pinching/mixing action versions are correct;
5-28
current action is forbidden (because 2. Before troubleshooting,

forbidden at least one of the 3 make sure all cables of the
motors of the mixing related parts are properly
assembly is not at the connected, e.g. check if the
home position) cables connecting motor
and photocoupler are
properly connected, if the
photocoupler or motor
cables are accordingly
connected to labeled
positions;
removed;
4. Perform mixing
5. Check if the
not blocked;
side;
not, replace with a new one;
8. If the error still exists,
check the motor to see if it
does not reach the
likely to happen).
5-29
 Autoloading Feed
Table 5-12

X-direction
Software command is versions are correct;
0x01005700 loading motor in
delayed 2. Click "Remove Error;"
action
the analyzer
1. Check if the
not blocked;
The X-direction error and remove it. Check if
loading home position there is dust or splashed
X-direction
photocouplers are not fluid covering the glittering
0x01005701 loading motor
blocked when they are side;
action error 1
supposed to be 3. Wipe the photocoupler
blocked and mount it back to see if
4. Remove the error;
5. Check if there is
interference between the
loading unit and the cover of
the autoloader
1. Make sure there is no
tube rack in the tube rack
position;
2. Click "Remove Error";
3. If the error is not
X-direction removed, check if the
Tube rack or
loading motor micro-switch is OK. See if it
0x01005702 micro-switch is
current action is in different states when
blocked in Y-direction
forbidden blocked and not blocked;
4. Check if the cables are
properly connected to the
micro-switch;
replace the micro-switch.
5-30
1. Confirm the current

position of the loading
mechanism;
2. If it is between the home
position and the end
position: a. check if there is
any interference along the
The end position
loading pathway (e.g.
photocouplers are
interference with the cover,
blocked when the
obstacle on the loading tray,
loading mechanism is
X-direction tube rack improperly placed,
at the home position;
0x01005703 loading motor etc.); b. if there is no
or the end position
action error 2 interference, check if the
motor is OK, and the cables
blocked when the
are properly connected to it.
loading mechanism is
3. If it is at the home or end
at the end position
position, check if the
photocouplers are OK. See
if the photocouplers are in
different states when
blocked and not blocked,
and the photocoupler cables
are all properly connected.
related parts are properly
connected, e.g. check if the
photocoupler cables are
properly and accordingly
The home position positions;
photocouplers and 2. Check if there is any
X-direction
end position obstacle blocking the two
loading motor
0x01005704 photocouplers of the photocouplers;
photocoupler
loading tray are 3. Click "Remove Error" to
error
blocked at the same see if the error can be
time removed;
4. Perform mixing
5. Check if the
5-31

not blocked;
side;
1. If there is no tube rack on
the loading tray: could be
X-direction loading end
position photocoupler error.
Check if the end position
photocouplers are OK;
2. If there is/are tube rack(s)
on the loading tray:
a. the micro-switch is not
After the loading, if
pressed by any tube rack:
both the loading end
check for obstacle or
position
X-direction interference on the loading
photocouplers and
0x01005705 loading motor tray; check if all tube racks
tube detection
loading error are correctly placed (make it
micro-switch are not
unable to press the
blocked, the error will
micro-switch);
be reported
b. the micro-switch is
pressed by tube rack: check
if the micro-switch works
properly;
3. If all the items above are
checked to be OK, check if
the loading motor works
properly and all the cables
FX_READY make sure all cables of the
Loading micro-switch error: it is related parts are properly
0x01005708 micro-switch detected to be connected, e.g. check
error pressed when it is not whether the photocoupler
pressed cables are properly
connected, if the
5-32

accordingly connected to
the labeled positions;
2. Check whether there is
any obstacle blocking the
photocouplers;
removed;
4. Check if the
if they are in different states
when blocked and not
blocked;
5. Check if the
photocouplers work
improperly, or the
micro-switch is aged that
could be not able to go up
and down properly.
Y-direction
Software command is versions are correct;
0x01005900 feeding motor in
delayed 2. Click "Remove Error;"
action
the analyzer
When there is a tube
Y-direction rack along the feeding
motor pathway, the error will
0x01005901
initialization be reported when the
forbidden autoloading count is 1. Remove the tube rack
started 2. Click "Remove Error"
1. If the unloading tray
photocouplers are
confirmed to be blocked,
The unloading tray
remove the tube racks on
photocouplers are
Unloading the tray.
0x01005902 blocked, which means
action error 2. If there is no tube rack on
that the unloading tray
the unloading tray, check if
is full
the photocouplers work
properly and all cables are
well connected.
Y-direction The Y-direction 1. Check if all software
0x01005903
feeding motor feeding home position versions are correct;
5-33
action error photocouplers are 2. Before troubleshooting,

blocked when it is make sure all cables of the
supposed to be not related parts are properly
blocked, or not connected, e.g. check if the
blocked when they are cables connecting motor
supposed to be and photocoupler are
blocked. properly connected, if the
positions;
removed;
4. Perform feeding
5. Check if the
not blocked;
side;
does not reach the
likely to happen).
Unloading The unloading home 1. Check if all software
position position versions are correct;
0x01005904
photocoupler photocouplers are 2. Before troubleshooting,
error blocked when they are make sure all cables of the
5-34

blocked, or not connected, e.g. check
blocked when they are whether the photocoupler
supposed to be cables are properly
blocked. connected, if the
accordingly connected to
the labeled positions;
removed;
4. Perform feeding
5. Check if the unloading
mechanism works properly,
and if the gear rack can run
out properly. If the gear rack
cannot run out or cannot
reach the photocoupler
detection area, check the
mechanism;
6. Check if the
not blocked;
side.
The Y-direction 1. Check if all software
feeding right versions are correct;
Y-direction right
photocouplers are 2. Before troubleshooting,
0x01005905 photocoupler
blocked when they are make sure all cables of the
error
blocked, or not connected, e.g. check if the
5-35
blocked when they are cables connecting motor

supposed to be and photocoupler are
blocked. properly connected, if the
positions;
removed;
4. Perform feeding
5. Check if the
The Y-direction photocouplers are OK: see
feeding left if the they are in different
Y-direction left blocked when they are not blocked;
0x01005906 photocoupler supposed to be not 6. For photocoupler error,
error blocked, or not find the photocoupler with
blocked when they are error and remove it. Check if
supposed to be there is dust or splashed
blocked. fluid covering the glittering
side;
does not reach the
likely to happen).
Y-direction feeding 1. Check if all software
home position versions are correct;
photocouplers not 2. Before troubleshooting,
Y-direction
blocked, which means make sure all cables of the
0x01005908 feeding motor
the motor is not at the related parts are properly
feeding error
home position, and connected, e.g. check if the
the feeding is cables connecting motor
forbidden and photocoupler are
5-36
properly connected, if the

positions;
removed;
4. Perform feeding
5. Check if the
not blocked;
side;
does not reach the
likely to happen).
Error reported in the 1. Check the state of the
following cases: Y-direction home position
1. Y-direction feeding photocouplers and that of
home position the unloading home position
Y-direction
photocouplers are not photocouplers, and make
blocked sure they are OK and the
unloading error
2. Unloading home cables are properly
position connected;
photocouplers are not 2. Check if there is any
blocked interference in the feeding
5-37
3. Left photocoupler process, which make the

counter not 0 tube rack not fully pass the
left photocoupler
1. Make sure the 3106 tube
racks are used;
2. Make sure there is no
obstacle along the feeding
Y-direction left
Unexpected hop of pathway;
and right
the left and right 3. Make sure the left and
0x0100590D photocouplers
photocouplers while right photocouplers, as well
cooperation
pushing the tube rack as all cables connected to
error
them are OK;
4. Make sure the
photocoupler barriers are
well mounted
1. Check if there is a tube
rack with tube(s) at the tube
detection position;
2. If no, check if the tube
detection photocouplers are
OK; place a tube at the tube
detection position, and
check if the photocouplers
Tube detection
Tube detection are in different states when
photocouplers
photocouplers are blocked and not blocked;
0x0100590F are blocked
blocked after 3. Check if there is an
after
initialization obstacle along the pathway
initialization.
of L photocoupler detection;
4. Wipe the photocouplers
and check if they work
properly;
replace the tube detection
photocouplers with a new
pair
Right photocoupler 1. Check if there is any
does not change after obstacle along the tube rack
Right trying the feeding feeding pathway which
photocoupler action for 5 times, prevents the tube rack from
0x01005910 damaged; or which is probably moving;
unable to drag because the right 2. Check if all software and
the tube rack photocoupler is hardware versions are
damaged or the tube correct;
rack cannot be 3. Check if all cables
5-38
dragged connected to the right

photocouplers are properly
connected, and if there is
any damage;
4. Check if the right
photocouplers are OK:
press the spring leaf, and
check if the photocouplers
are in normal state;
5. Check if the photocoupler
barrier is properly mounted,
and if the photocoupler is
blocked when pressing the
barrier;
6. Replace the cables, and
check if the photocoupler
works properly;
7. Replace the
photocouplers
 Sample Compartment Door and Others
Table 5-13

autoloading board MCU and
FPGA versions are correct; check
if the autoloading board 24V,
12V, 5V powers are normal;
2. Check if the sample
compartment door is open; if it is
open, check if the compartment
door detection photocouplers and
Opening sample Unable to open the
the cables connected to them are
0x01005a01 compartment sample compartment
OK;
door failed door
3. If the door is not open, check if
the electromagnet cable is well
connected;
4. Manually open and close the
compartment door, and see if
there is interference or
obstruction.
Note: make sure the sample
probe is not inside the sample
5-39
compartment while opening and

closing the compartment door.
This error only occurs in the
Adjustment position adjustment performed by
Adjusted valve out of
0x01005a04 parameter out of manufacture or service
range
range engineers. Re-adjust when this
error is reported.
1 Check if the software,
autoloading board MCU and
FPGA versions are correct; check
if the autoloading board 24V,
Read scanner error. 12V, 5V powers are normal;
Read scanner
0x01005a05 No message is sent 2. Check if the cables to the
error
back in 500ms scanner are well connected;
3. Restart the analyzer, and see if
the error still exists;
4. If the error still exists, replace
the scanner
 Autoloading board communication
Table 5-14

0x01005801 Functional code 1. First check if autoloading
error version is correct;
0x01005802 Data length 2. Then check if the cables
error connecting autoloading
0x01005803 Command board and data board are
identifier error properly connected;
0x01005804 Check code 3. Restart the analyzer and
error see if it may work properly;
0x01005805 End code error 4. If the error still exists,
0x01005806 Identification replace the autoloading
code error board.
0x01005820 Driver board
FPGA download
symbol error
0x01005821 Driver board Communication error
FPGA download
command error
0x01005822 Read-write
configuration
chip address out
5-40
of range
0x01005823 Written data out
of limit
0x01005824 The number of
written data and
the first address
overflow page
size
0x01005825 Writing
forbidden
0x01005826 Drive board
FPGA write
overtime
0x01005a00 EEPROM data Replace the autoloading
invalid board
5.1.8 Reagent Detection
Table 5-15

Check diluent Click the "Reagent" button
expiration dates at on the "Maintenance"
0x01003070 Diluent expired 10:00 every morning screen to display
and at analyzer information of valid and
startup unexpired reagents.
Check LH reagent Click the "Reagent" button
HGB lyse
0x01003071 10:00 every morning screen to display
expired
Check LEOI reagent Click the "Reagent" button
DIFF1 lyse
expired
Check LEOII lyse Click the "Reagent" button
DIFF2 lyse
expired
0x01003096 Insufficient diluent 1.Residual reagent Click “Remove Error” to
volume is lower than load new and valid
20% of total amount reagents on the popped out
5-41
per software records; reagent box, and replace

2.Hardware reports no the reagent accordingly.
reagent, and software
records show residual
volume is lower than
3%
0x01003097 Insufficient HGB 1.Residual reagent
lyse volume is lower than
20% of total amount Click “Remove Error” to
per software records; load new and valid
2.Hardware reports no reagents on the popped out
reagent, and software reagent box, and replace
records show residual the reagent accordingly.
3%
0x01003098 Insufficient DIFF1 1.Residual reagent
3%
0x01003099 Insufficient DIFF2 1.Residual reagent
3%
1. Check if the waste
container is actually full;
2. Check if the float sensor
is perfectly floating;
3. Check if the cables and
Waste container
0x01003085 Waste container full connectors to the waste
full
sensor are OK;
4. Check if the waste
sensor connectors on the
drive board are properly
connected;
5-42
5. Replace the waste

sensor
1. Check if there is really
no diluent in the diluent
container;
2. Check if the float sensor
is perfectly floating;
3. Check if the cables and
connectors to the diluent
sensor are OK;
4. Check if the diluent
sensor connectors on the
drive board are properly
0x01003080 No diluent No diluent connected;
5. Replace the diluent float
sensor;
connecting the reagent
testing board and drive
board are properly
connected;
7. Check if the reagent
detecting sensor is OK;
8. Replace the reagent
testing board
0x01003081 No HGB lyse No HGB lyse 1. Check if the lyse really
0x01003082 No DIFF1 lyse No DIFF1 lyse runs out;
connecting the reagent
testing board and drive
board are properly
connected;
3. Check if the reagent
detecting sensor is OK;
4. Replace the reagent
0x01003083 No DIFF2 lyse No DIFF2 lyse testing board
5.1.9 Flow Cell Clog
Table 5-16

When the sequence is 1. If the error cannot be
0x01000611 Flow cell clog
running, the relieve removed by clicking
5-43
valve photocouplers "Remove Error", then the

are relieve valve photocouplers
blocked/unblocked are still blocked. Follow
below steps to remove the
error:
1. a Check if you have
logged in the system at the
R&D access level. If yes,
switch the access level,
and run fluidic initialization
1. b Check if the relieve
valve photocouplers are
blocked:
1.b.1 If yes, unplug the
pipes at both ends of the
relive valve
1.b.1.1 If the photocouplers
are still blocked, then the
relieve valve is with error.
Replace the relieve valve.
1.b.1.2 If the photocouplers
are no longer blocked, then
the error is located at other
parts
1.b.2 If no, then the circuit
is with error, probably
caused by photocoupler or
cable problem
1.c Check if pinch valve
PV28 and the silica gel
inside it are OK. Rotate the
valve and drag the gel left
and right, to ensure the gel
is not pressed or bent.
1.d Check if the DIFF bath
filling opening is clogged. If
the error is reported after
several measurements,
skip this step. If the error is
reported just at startup, and
the analyzer has been
serviced earlier or there is
un-addressed error before
last shutdown, pay special
5-44
attention to this point. Soak

the bath in probe cleanser
for 5 minutes.
1.e Check if valve V15 can
be opened and closed
normally, and if TT39 or
T40 is bent
2. If the error seems to be
removed by clicking
"Remove Error", but when
running next sample, the
analyzer again reports that
flow cell is clogged
2.a First perform the flow
cell unclogging and DIFF
bath probe cleanser
maintenance. If the error
still remains, follow below
steps to remove the error:
2.b Check valve V18, if V18
cannot open and close
normally or it is clogged
inside, or the pipes around
it are bent or crooked,
exam T24 and T22
carefully;
2.c Check valve V17, if V17
cannot open and close
normally or it is clogged
inside, or the pipes around
it are bent or crooked,
exam T26 carefully;
2.d If the flow cell is
clogged by foreign
substances, manually
pump the flow cell at its
inlet with the syringe. This
step is highly suggested
when the analyzer is newly
installed or has been left
unused for a long time.
2.e Check if the preset
relieve valve alarm
pressure is set too low, or
5-45
the cover is damaged, or

the spring is rusted. This
step is highly suggested
when the analyzer is newly
installed or has been left
unused for a long time.
5.1.10Background abnormal
Table 5-17

1. Make sure the diluent is not
frozen, and has stood still for over
24 hours
2. If there have been unusual
The background
problems, such as analyzer having
Background results exceed
0x01002000 been left unused for a long time, or
abnormal Mindray required
unsuccessful shutdown, perform
ranges.
fluidics probe cleanser maintenance
and fluidics cleaning.
3. If operator operated the analyzer
correctly, perform fluidics cleaning.
1. Click the “Remove” button to
Photocoupler
Photocoupler blank remove this error.
0x01002041 blank voltage
voltage out of range 2. If the error still exists, contact our
out of range
Customer Service Department.
5.1.11HGB Abnormal
Table 5-18

1.Check if the HGB bath LED
lights on; if not, check the HGB
1.HGB blank voltage
signal line, the corresponding
is out of the specified
board, and the board connector.
range of [3.2V,4.9V]
HGB blank 2.Check if the diluent container is
during the analysis.
0x01003060 voltage correctly connected, and if the
2.When the analyzer
abnormal diluent is valid; if not, replace the
is idle, HGB voltage is
diluent and then click "Remove
out of the specified
Error";
range of [3.2V,4.9V].
3.Check if the inside of HGB bath
is clean; if not, perform "probe
5-46
cleanser maintenance", and then

click "Remove Error";
4.Check if the liquid in the HGB
bath is in normal level; if not,
check if HGB bath waste tubing,
diluent tubing and fluidic actions
are normal;
5.Replace HGB bath and HGB
analysis assembly.
5.1.12Clogging
Table 5-19

1.Perform the "zap apertures",
"flush apertures" and "unclog"
During the analysis, procedures for several times.
the aperture is 2.If the clogging issue remains,
completely or partially perform fluidics probe cleanser
clogged, causing maintenance.
slower flow rate 3.If the clogging issue still
0x01002010 WBC clogging
through the aperture remains, fill the probe cleanser
and higher aperture into the counting bath, and soak
pressure, which in the bath for 10 minutes.
turn trigger the 4. If the clogging issue still
clogging alarm remains, take apart the aperture
and soak it into probe cleanser.
Clean the aperture manually.
5.1.13Other Errors
Table 5-20

During the
maintenance process,
Maintenance the analyzer checks if
action not there is diluent as the Replace the diluent, and the
0x010030B0
finished due to sequence designs. If click "Remove Error".
"No diluent" error there is no diluent, the
error will be reported,
and the maintenance
5-47
action will be ended to

avoid draining the
cistern. Fluid cleaning
and initialization will
be performed during
error reset.
During the
maintenance process,
the analyzer checks if
there is diluent as the
Maintenance sequence designs. If
action not there is no diluent, the Replace the diluent, and the
0x010030B1
finished due to error will be reported, click "Remove Error".
"No diluent" error and the maintenance
action will be ended to
avoid draining the
cistern. There will be
no error reset action.
When exiting the
standby mode, the
analyzer checks if
there is diluent as the
Exiting the
sequence designs. If Replace the diluent, and the
0x010030B2 standby mode
there is no diluent, the click "Remove Error".
failed
error will be reported,
and the exiting action
will be ended to avoid
draining the cistern.
5-48
6 Luidic System
6.1 Measurement Flow

The fluidic system of the analyzer contains 3 analyzing channels:
 DIFF & optical channel
 WBC & HGB channel
 RBC & PLT channel
The system flow chart of whole blood CD mode is as follows: (The CBC mode does not involve
DIFF & optical channels)
Constant
940ul temperature
DIFF1 lyse
36℃
275ul
DIFF2 lyse
DIFF differential
9ul sample DIFF bath (1:136) Measurement Flow cell
measurement
Whole blood
sample
2.5ml 0.5ml
Diluent LH lyse
WBC count
6ul sample WBC bath(1:418） WBC bath(1:503） HGB
measurement
52ul
2.448ml RBC count

Diluent RBC bath (1:20049)
PLT count
Figure 6-1 Fluidic system flow chart (whole blood CD mode)
The system flow chart of predilute CD mode is as follows: (The CBC mode does not involve
DIFF & optical channels)
Constant
970ul temperature
DIFF1 lyse
36℃
245ul
DIFF2 lyse
DIFF differential
40ul sample DIFF bath(1:314) Measurement Flow cell
measurement
Predilute
sample 1:10
2.46ml 0.5ml
Diluent LH lyse
WBC count
40ul sample WBC bath(1:625) WBC bath(1:753) HGB
measurement
60ul
2.440ml RBC count

Diluent RBC bath(1:26042)
PLT count
Figure 6-2 Fluidic system flow chart (predilute CD mode)
6-1
Luidic System
6.1.1 WBC&HGB Channel
6.1.1.1 WBC analysis

 Reagents used:
M-53LH lyse: dissolves RBC, PLT, and differentiates basophils from other WBCs by size.
Diluent: cleans the system, and provides environment for reaction and analysis.
 Analysis principle: the impedance method
 Analysis parameters: WBC,BASO#,BASO%
 Graph information: WBC histogram
 Dilution ratio:1：503*1
 Analysis Duration: 12s
 Analysis pressure: -32kpa
 Measuring volume: the measuring volume is controlled by controlling the vacuum and
analysis duration. The stability of vacuum shall be ensured so that the aperture flow can
be stable, thus the measuring volume can be calculated by controlling the analysis
duration.
 Function description: 6μl of blood, 2.5ml of diluent and 0.5ml of LH lyse are mixed and
reacted in the counting bath, and then the compound is aspirated into the back bath via
the aperture by vacuum of the vacuum chamber, the cells are analyzed when they passes
the aperture.
6.1.1.2 HGB analysis

 Reagents used:
Diluent: for dilution and cleaning

LH lyse: dissolves RBCs and bonds HGB
 Measurement principle: colorimetric method
 Analysis parameter: HGB
 Dilution ratio:1：503
The analysis principle of HGB channel is colorimetric method. By comparing the scatter light
intensity of the diluent and the sample, the HGB concentration can be obtained.
1Dilution ratio in this chapter refers to the dilution ratio of whole blood mode, if not otherwise
stated.
6-2
Luidic System
6.1.2 DIFF & optical channel
 Reagents used:
LEO(I), LEO(II) lyse: dissolves RBCs, and differentiates WBCs.

Diluent: for cleaning and forming of sheath fluid.
 Analysis principle: flow cytometry, semi-conductive laser scatter method
 Analysis parameter: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS#

and EOS%
 Graph information:4-DIFF scattergram
 Analysis flow: 0.0077216ml/s
 Measuring volume: the sample flow is stable, by controlling the analysis duration, the
measuring volume can be calculated.
 Function description: 0.3ml of Leo(I) lyse is added to clean the DIFF bath, after that
0.94ml of Leo(I) lyse and 9μl blood are added and left for reaction for a while. Then 275ul l
Leo(II) lyse is added, and again left for reaction for a while. The sample will be delivered
to below the flow cell, the sheath fluid syringe is started to form sheath fluid, and the
sample syringe is started to push the sample into the flow cell for analysis.
6.1.3 RBC/PLT channel
 Reagents used:
Diluent: for dilution, cleaning, providing conducting environment and isometric processing of
cells.
 Analysis principle: the impedance method
 Analysis parameters: RBC, PLT
 Graphics: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
 Analysis pressure: -32kpa
 Measuring volume: the measuring volume is controlled by controlling the vacuum and
analysis duration. The stability of vacuum shall be ensured so that the aperture flow can
be stable, thus the measuring volume can be calculated by controlling the analysis
duration.
 Function description: the sample probe aspirates 52.08μl of sample (dilution rate: 1: 417.7)
from the WBC bath; the sample probe moves to RBC bath to mix the sample with 2.5ml of
diluent, the dilution rate of the sample is1:20049. The sample is then aspirated into the
bath back through the aperture by vacuum of the vacuum chamber, the cells are analyzed
6-3
Luidic System
when they pass the aperture.
6.2 Sample Volume

Table 6-1 Sample volume
Whole
Capillary
Items blood Predilute mode
blood mode
mode
Dilute 20uL of blood manually: 180uL of
CD mode 33L 33L
diluent, aspirate 80L
Dilute 20uL of blood manually: 180uL of
CBC mode 24L 24L
diluent, aspirate 40L
6.3 Temperature of Fluidics

Table 6-2 Temperature control of the fluidic system
Preheating Optical Reactio

Items
bath System n bath
Target temperature℃ 30 35 36
Alarming temperature ℃ ±6 ±5 ±1.5
6.4 Reagent Consumption Volume

Table 6-3 Reagent volume
Test panel Diluent LEO(I) LEO (II) lyse LH lyse PROBE

(ml) (ml) (ml) (ml) CLEANSER
(ml)
Whole blood CBC 38 0 0 0.5 0
mode CD 48.8 1.24 0.275 0.5 0
Capillary whole CBC 38 0 0 0.5 0
blood mode CD 48.8 1.24 0.275 0.5 0
Predilute mode CBC 31 0 0 0.5 0
CD 40 1.27 0.245 0.5 0
Shutdown 208 1.25 1.25 1.2 3.6
Normal startup 83 2 2 2 0
Startup after abnormal 130 3 3 3 0
shutdown
6-4
Luidic System
Exit from standby 13 0 0 0 0

status 1
Exit from standby 65 0 0 0 0
status 2
Exit from standby 98 0 0 0.25 0
status 3
6.5 Introduction to Fluidic Parts

This section introduces the fluidics components and their functions, the symbols refer to the
symbols in the fluidics diagram.
6.5.1 Mindray valves
 Symbol:
2-way valve 3-way valve
 Appearance:
2-way valve 3-way valve
Spring pole
 Function:
2-way valve: to build up or cut off a passage. When power off, the passage from the inlet of the
valve to outlet is cut off; when power on, the passage is built up.
3-way valve: to switch among passages. When power off, the public end and the NO (normally
open) end are connected; when power on, the public end and the N.O.(normally open) end are
connected.
 Note:
the operating voltage of Mindray valves is 12V, and maximal bearable pressure is 200KPa.
6-5
Luidic System
The internal movement of the valves is driven by electromagnet and the restoration is driven
by the spring, so it is recommended not put the valves power-on for too long. When the
electromagnet valve is working, the spring pole will lower down, and it will rise to the initial
position when power off. You can touch the spring pole and feel the descending or ascending,
in order to determine whether it is in action.
6.5.2 Two-way pressure proof Mindray valve
 Symbol
Same as the 2-way Mindray valve.
 Appearance
 Function: pressure resistance of the two-way pressure proof Mindray valve is greater than
that of the ordinary two-way Mindray valve, their operating principle is the same.
 Note: Be sure to distinguish the ordinary two-way valve and the pressure proof two-way
valve when replacing the valves.
6.5.3 LVM fluidic valve
 Symbol
Same as the Mindray valves
 Appearance
Two-way LVM fluidic valve Three-way LVM fluidic valve
 Function: same as the Mindray valves. The pressure resistance of this valve is greater
6-6
Luidic System
than that of the two-way pressure proof Mindray valve, so it can adapt to greater
temperature and pressure change.
 Note: the maximal bearable pressure of the LVM fluidic valve is 200KPa, and the CV of
the flow is about 0.03.
6.5.4 Pinch valve
 Symbol:
PV28
 Appearance:
 Function: clamp type, on/off controlled by electromagnetic power. The valve controls the
flow and break of fluid.
6.5.5 Liquid filter
 Symbol:
6-7
Luidic System
 Appearance:
LF1 LF2
 Function: filters the impurities in diluent.
 Note: LF1 is probe wipe filter, LF2 is sheath fluid filter.
6.5.6 Syringe
 Symbol:
A A
A
100ul/250ul 2.5ml 10ml
 Appearance: N/A.
 Function: There are 5 types of syringes, their parameters and functions are as follows:
Table 6-4 List of syringe parameters and functions
Name Label Specification Functions

The syringe aspirates fixed amount of
Aspirate Full range
Asp-Syringe blood sample and diluted sample, and
syringe 100ul
dispense the sample.
The syringe dispenses fixed amount of
Diluent Full
Dil-Syringe diluent to the WBC and RBC bath,
syringe range10ml
provides diluent to the probe wipe, and
6-8
Luidic System
clean the sample probe and counting

bath.
Full
range2.5m l, 3
Lyse The syringe dispenses M-53LEO(I),
Lyse-Syringe syringe tubes
syringe M-53LEO(II) and M-53LH lyse.
are driven by
one motor.
The syringe pushes sheath fluid into flow
cell, cleans the flow cell, prepares
Sheath
Full sample and cleans the DIFF bath and
fluid Sh-Syringe
range10ml inside of the sample probe. It aspirates
syringe
and dispenses probe cleanser in probe
cleanser maintenance procedure.
Sample Full range The syringe pushes sample into the flow
Sp-Syringe
syringe 250ul cell for measurement.
6.5.7 Pumps
6.5.7.1 Pressure pump

 Symbol:
GP
 Appearance:
 Function: provides pressure to the pressure chamber
6-9
Luidic System
6.5.7.2 Vacuum pump

 Symbol
LP2
LP3
 Appearance:
 Function:
LP2: the pump drains the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.
LP3: the pump drains the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber, and generates vacuum of the
vacuum chamber.
6.5.8 Sample probe
 Symbol
6-10
Luidic System
 Appearance:
Sample probe
 Function: provides a corrosion resistant cavity, which is able to aspirate and dispense
blood and probe cleanser.
Note: The sample probe tip is tapered so as to pierce sample tube cap.
6.5.9 Probe wipe
 Symbol:
 Appearance:
CT probe wipe
 Function: provides a cavity to clean sample probe under the effect of liquid flow, and to
6-11
Luidic System
collect the waste produced.
6.5.10Pressure relief valve
 Symbol:
RV
 Appearance:
Photocoupler
Barrier
 Function: detects the pressure in the sheath fluid channel, when the pressure goes
beyond specified range, the photocoupler will be blocked, and alarm signal will be given.
6.5.11Pressure sensor
 Symbol:
Hydraulic
sensor
PS1
6-12
Luidic System
 Appearance:
 Function: detects pressure in the sample collection channel and abnormalities of sample
aspiration.
6.5.12Aspiration monitoring photocoupler
 Symbol:
6-13
Luidic System
 Appearance:
 Function: detects status of end segment blood and abnormalities of sample aspiration.
6.5.13Baths
 WBC bath: the WBC bath is formed by the front bath, back bath and aperture. The bath
provides space for WBC sample mixing and reaction, which serves HGB and WBC
measurement.
 RBC bath: the RBC bath is formed by the front bath, back bath and aperture. The bath
provides space for RBC sample mixing and reaction, which serves RBC/PLT
measurement.
 DIFF reaction bath: provides space for DIFF sample mixing and reaction, and provides
prepared DIFF sample.
 Vacuum chamber: generates and stores stable vacuum for WBC and RBC impedance
counting, cleans the back bath, and drains the flow cell when it is clogged to remove
impurities.
 Pressure chamber: generates and stores stable pressure for bubble generation of the
baths and aperture flushing.
 WBC isolating chamber: provides room to block interference signals from outside.
 RBC isolating chamber: provides room to block interference signals from outside.
6-14
Fluidic System
6.6 Introduction of Fluidic Structure

See the following fluidic structure diagram:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MRSZ/R05N01.291.01（2.0） REV ECN DESCRIPTION DESIGN
CR-3109- Add P1, modify length of P2 Feng
3.0 012 / Xiang
SV18 Add joinst of sampling and probe wipe Feng
4.0 EHM002-F channel, modify the connections. Modify
pinch valve part No.
Xiang
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
J44-T174-J45 T175 J1-T11-J2 C81 C80 C45 C49 DILUENT
T170 T169 T4
A DIL
T25 C14 C46 C50 LEO（I） LYSE
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
DIFF bath C83 C1 C47 C51
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
LF2 J3-T12 -J4 C2 C48 C52 LH LYSE
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
B T36 GF2
T35 C27
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
Isolating
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1 C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
C42 Transducer C69 C24
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
C
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
名称:
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
D RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
SPB Bath shielding Bath shielding C31 T86
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
T126 T125 C34
Probe
wipe
Isolating T97 Isolating T109 T111
T127
chamber 2 T98 chamber 3 T110
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
E C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
C43
LP2 保密密级：机密
Waste C11
container
T129 T121 T116 CONFIDENTIAL
LP3 TITLE 3109 Fluidic diagram
DOC No. A1-115-031792-00
F
保密:此图及其全部知识产权(含著作权)归深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司所有。未经深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司预先书面许可,严禁出于任何目的,对此图的全部或部分内容(包括但不限于图中信息、数据、运算结果等)泄露、使用、拷贝或复制。 DESIGN 薛树斌 REV. 4.0
Classified documents, This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No disclosure,use,copies or reproductions
should be made of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray P.CODE 3109 SIZE A3
Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd Software &Rev:
SHEET 1 OF 12
Microsoft visio 2003
6-15
Fluidic System
6.6.1 Sample aspiration and dispensing channel
The structure of the sample aspiration and dispensing channel is as follows:
SV14
C28
T35 T36 C27
T34
C29
T47
T45
T149
SV13
C36
T46 Diluent
T150
T48
T37
T57
P8-J47
T50 SV01 SV03 SV02
C76
T163 T53
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T178
T56
T124
Hydraulic
sensor
PS1
Blood sensor 1
DIL(10mL)
SH(10mL)
T179
ASP(100uL)
C86
SPB
LF1
C87
T126 T125 Waste
拭子
T127
pump
6-16
Fluidic System
Major functions:
1. Sample aspiration and dispensing. The ASP syringe and sample probe SPB works together to aspirate 33uL 2 of blood, and dispenses 9uL, 6uL and
52.08uL of blood into different channels.
2. Cleaning inside and outside of the sample probe. Cleaning inside of the sample probe can be done by DIL syringe, SV01, 02, and 03 valves working
together, it can also be done by SH syringe, SV13 and 14 valves working together. Cleaning outside of the sample probe is done by DIL syringe, SV02
and 03 valves working together. Waste is collected by the probe wipe and waste pump.
3. Aspirating and dispensing probe cleanser. When aspirating probe cleanser, SV13 and SV14 is electrified, the SH syringe aspirates 3.6mL of probe
cleanser from the sample probe SPB. The probe cleanser is stored in the reservoir T47 (marked in red in the figure above). When dispensing probe
cleanser, the sample aspirating assembly delivers the sample probe to the reaction baths (DIFF, WBC and RBC bath), SV13 and SV14 is electrified, the
SH syringe dispenses certain amount of probe cleanser to the counting bath.
6.6.2 WBC&HGB Channel
The structure of the WBC&HGB channel is as follows:

The blue lines are the flowing paths of diluent, the peach lines are the flowing paths of lyse, and the wine lines are the sample flowing paths (this rule applies to
all following figures in this chapter).
Refers to whole blood CD mode. For whole blood CBC mode, the volume is 24uL of blood, for predilute CD mode, the volume is 80uL of prediluted blood,
while for predilute CBC mode, the volume is 40uL of prediluted blood. If not otherwise specified, the mode in this chapter refers to whole blood CD mode.
6-17
Fluidic System
C67
T153
T152
J9-T13-J10
DH T58
SV07 C2
C66
T151
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02
T5 C52 C48
T53 T1
T55
T49
SV04
J31-T137-J32
WBC C20 SV22
T56
T92
C32 Diluent
T90 Reagent
T10
T96
T61
T94
detection
T57
T91 SV21 Vacuum
Diluent T93 T95
C21
T62 chamber C53
DIL(10mL)
J27-T89-J28
C56
Bath shielding
(T88)
cover SV12 Pressure
container
LH lyse
T141
T114
chamber
Waste
T97 SV23
Isolating pump
T157
T117
T99
T98 LYSE(2.5mLX3)
chamber 2 C70
6.6.2.1 WBC analysis

The diluent syringe dispenses diluent into the WBC bath along the blue paths, the sample probe dispenses blood sample into the WBC bath, and the lyse
syringe dispenses LH lyse into the WBC bath along the peach paths. The sample, diluent and lyse are mixed by bubbles generated by the pressure chamber
via SV12, and aspirated into the back bath by vacuum via the aperture (wine lines). The cells are measured when they pass the aperture, and the sample
volume is calculated from the analysis duration. After analysis, the WBC bath is drained by SV23 and the waste pump.
6.6.2.2 HGB analysis

The analysis principle of the HGB channel is colorimetric method. By comparing the intensity of the transmitted light through the background and the blood, the
HGB concentration can be obtained. The intensity of the transmitted light through the diluent is detected first, and during WBC analysis, the intensity of the
6-18
Fluidic System
transmitted light through the blood sample is detected, the ratio of the two intensity valves is the HGB result.
6.6.3 DIFF & optical channel
The structure of the DIFF & optical channel is as follows:

C15 J1-T11-J2
J19-T24-J20
SV17
C13 T25 C14
J39-T14 -J11
C46 C50
T28 T29 SV18 T7 T3
J40-T15-J12
T31
LF2 DIFF bath C1 C47 C51
T6 T2
T131
J25-T26-J26
J35-T139-J36
(T21)
C12 J3-T12 -J4
T27
C48 C52
C77
SV05 SV06
Flow
T164
J17-T22-J18
T30
J33-T138-J34
cell
Reagent
T8
T9
RV SV15 detection
T32
PV28
J42-T165-J43
J7-T39-J8 T16 C54 C55
SV14 J21-T40-J22
C57 C58
T44
LEO(II) reagent
T33
T34
LEO(I) reagent
C26 T43 J16-T17-J41
T45
C25
container
C29
T143
container
T142
J23-T42-J24
Diluent
J5-T18 -J6
T35
T38
C28
T41
T36
C27 SV16
T37
T47
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
C64
T149
SV10
SP(250uL)
SV08
C4 Pressure
T69
T19 J13-T20-J14
SH(10mL)
T68
chamber
T160
SV13 Waste
T87
Isolating
chamber 1 pump
SV27
T166
Vacuum
chamber
Figure 6-3
Leo(I) lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath by lyse syringe via T11, Leo(II) lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath by lyse syringe via T12. Bubbles are dispensed
from the pressure chamber to DIFF bath via SV10, after reaction, the sample is transmitted under the flow cell along the orange line in the figure. The sheath
fluid syringe is started to form sheath fluid along the blue lines in the figure. The sample is driven to the flow cell for analysis by the sample syringe. After the
analysis, the sheath fluid syringe cleans the flow cell and sample preparing tubes along the blue lines in the figure. The DIFF bath is drained by waste pump
and SV27.
6-19
Fluidic System
6.6.4 RBC/PLT channel
The structure of the RBC/PLT channel is as follows:
C67
T153
T152
DH T58
SV07
C66
T151
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02
T53
T55
RBC C20 SV19
T56
T92
C32 Diluent
T90
T96
T61
T94
T57
T91 SV20 Vacuum
Diluent T93 T95
C21
T62 chamber
DIL(10mL)
J27-T89-J28
Bath shielding
(T88)
cover SV11Pressure
chamber
T114
Waste
T97 SV24
Isolating pump
T157
T117
T99
T98
chamber 2 C70
Figure 6-4
The diluent syringe dispenses diluent into the RBC bath along the blue paths, the sample probe dispenses diluted blood sample into the RBC bath. The sample
and diluent are mixed by bubbles generated by the pressure chamber via SV11, and aspirated into the back bath by vacuum via the aperture (wine lines). The
cells are measured when they pass the aperture, and the sample volume is calculated from the analysis duration. After analysis, the RBC bath is drained by
6-20
Fluidic System
SV24 and the waste pump.
6.7 Introduction to Sequences

Taking the CBC+DIFF analysis in the closed whole blood mode as an example:
6.7.1 Closed Whole Blood CD Mode Sample Analysis Sequence
The closed whole blood CD mode analysis sequence consists 3 parts:

Pre-piercing sequence, 5.6s
Piercing sequence, 4.4s
Analysis sequence, 60s
6.7.1.1 Pre-piercing Sequence

The fluidic actions are shown in the following figure.
0~1.2sSampling assembly moves from WBC bath up position to the sample aspiration position.
1.3~1.6sThe sample probe moves to position of the isolating bubbles.
1.7~1.9sV1 and V2 are opened, and the DIL syringe aspirates 50uL of isolating bubbles from the sample probe.
1.2sWaste pump LP2 is turned on to drain probe wipe waste pipe
3.5~4sThe SH syringe aspirated 450uL of diluent.
6-21
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T25 C46 C50 LEO（I） LYSE
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
C83 C1 C47 C51
J40-T15-J12
DIFF池 T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
wipe Isolating T97 Isolating T109 T111
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-22
Fluidic System
1.9~2.8sThe sample probe moves to the pre-piercing position.

2.9~4.4sThe sample probe returns to the initial position (inside the probe wipe), and the DIL syringe cleans the outside of the sample probe via the probe wipe.
4.5~5.1sThe SH syringe cleans the inside of the sample probe, and the DIL syringe cleans the outside of the sample probe via the probe wipe.
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-23
Fluidic System
Piercing Sequence
0~0.35sThe sample probe moves to position of the isolating bubbles.
0.1~2.75sThe DIL syringe aspirated 6750uL of diluent from the diluent container.
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27
T37
GF2
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
PS1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-24
Fluidic System
0.3~0.55sThe ASP syringe generated 2uL of isolating bubbles in the sample probe.
0.55~1.75sThe sample probe moves to the aspirating position
1.7~3.9sThe ASP syringe aspirates 33uL of blood from the sample probe
1.3-3.3s Drain the WBC bath
3.3-4.4s 2.2ml of diluent is added to the WBC bath.
3.9sWaste pump LP2 is turned on
6-25
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
Tightly
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32 T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
DH T153
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
PS1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-26
Fluidic System
6.7.1.2 Main Analysis Sequence

0~2.2sThe sample probe returns within the probe wipe
2.3~3.5sThe sampling assembly moves to the upper position of WBC bath
0.04~2.8sThe DIL syringe cleans the outside of the sample probe, during which the waste pump pumps the waste.
0~2.7sThe lyse syringe aspirates 2000uL of lyse (including LEO(I), LEO(II) and LH lyse)
2.5~3.5sMeasure HGB blank voltage
1.0~2.5sThe vacuum pump LP3 is turned on to drain the DIFF bath.
0~29sThe waste pump LP2 is turned on to drain the probe wipe waste pipe, RBC bath and WBC bath.
0~25.3sGenerates and maintains pressure in the pressure chamber
6-27
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T131
T164
J25-T26-J26 LH
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1 C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-28
Fluidic System
3.6s~4.6sThe sample probe descends within the WBC bath

4.6~5sThe sample probe swings and dispenses bubbles
2.8~3.8sThe valve V016 is turned on, and the LYSE syringe dispenses 300uL of LEO(I) into the DIFF bath.
0.5~5.1sThe SH syringe aspirates 8750uL of diluent.
5~6sThe sample probe returns within the probe wipe
5.1~6.3sThe DIL syringe cleans the outside of sample probe using the probe wipe
4.5~6sThe vacuum pump LP3 is turned on to drain the DIFF bath.
6-29
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
Isolating
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1 C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
fasten
C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T146 TightlyT79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

PS1
sensor
Blood sensor 11
C32 T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-30
Fluidic System
6~6.5sThe sampling assembly moves to the upper position of the DIFF bath
6.6~7.6sThe sample probe descends within the DIFF bath.
6.7~8.7sThe LYSE syringe dispenses 940uL of LEO(I) lyse into the DIFF bath.
7.6~9.1sThe sample probe swings
7.6~8.7sThe ASP syringe dispenses 9uL of blood sample into the DIFF bath.
8.1~13.9Turn on and off V10 continuously to generate bubbles to mix blood sample in the DIFF bath
6.8~8.75sThe DIL syringe aspirates 4800uL of diluent
6-31
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
T126 T125 C34
拭子
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-32
Fluidic System
9.1~10.1sThe sample probe returns within the probe wipe

10.8~11.7sThe sample probe descends within the WBC bath.
11.7~13.3sThe sample probe swings
11.6~12.6sThe ASP syringe dispenses 6uL of blood sample into the WBC bath.
12.6~15.2sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles to mix blood sample in the WBC bath
10.7~12.2sThe DIL syringe dispenses 2500uL of diluent into the WBC bath.
11-12.5 Drain RBC bath
12.6-13.25s Dispense 1ml of diluent into the RBC bath
13.4~14.4sThe LYSE syringe dispenses 135uL of LEO(II) lyse into the DIFF bath.
6-33
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1 C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-34
Fluidic System
13.4~14.25sThe sample probe moves to position of the isolating bubbles.

13.7-15.18s The ASP syringe aspirates the end segment blood back
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-35
Fluidic System
15.2~17s The SH syringe cleans the inside of sample probe
15~16.2s The LYSE syringe aspirates 600uL of lyse
6-36
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T131
T164
J25-T26-J26 LH
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL) chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
PS1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-37
Fluidic System
17.2~18.05sThe sample probe descends within the WBC bath.

18.3~20.2sThe ASP syringe aspirates 52.08uL of diluted blood sample
18.9~20sThe DIL syringe dispenses 1648uL of diluent into the RBC bath.
17.4~20s The SH syringe aspirates 1200uL of sample from the DIFF bath to prepare sample.
19sSwitch to constant current source
8~25sBuild vacuum in the vacuum chamber for the first time
6-38
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
PS1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-39
Fluidic System
20.2~21.2sThe sample probe returns within the probe wipe

20.7~21.7sThe LYSE syringe dispenses 500uL of LH lyse into the WBC bath.
20.5~23.6sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles to mix blood sample in the WBC bath
20.3~43.8sThe SH syringe generates sheath fluid in the flow cell
20.7~21.7sThe SP syringe pushes sample inside the liquid storing tubing to the flow cell rapidly.
22~40.6sThe SP syringe pushes sample inside the liquid storing tubing to the flow cell rapidly.
6-40
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-41
Fluidic System
21.3~21.9sThe sampling assembly moves to the position of the RBC bath

22~22.9sThe sample probe descends within the RBC bath.
22.6~24.7sThe ASP syringe dispenses 52.08uL of diluted blood sample inside the sample probe into the RBC bath.
22.6~25.1sThe DIL syringe dispenses 800uL of diluent into the RBC bath.
24~40sPerform DIFF analysis in the flow cell
25.5~26Turn on and off V11 continuously to generate bubbles to mix blood sample in the RBC bath
6-42
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL) chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
C36 T167
T146Tightly fasten
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
PS1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-43
Fluidic System
25.1~26sThe sample probe returns within the probe wipe

25.1~26.3sThe DIL syringe cleans the inside of sample probe
20~27.9sThe waste pump LP3 is turned on to drain the DIFF bath.
26.2~41.2sOpen the valve V21, the liquid in the WBC front bath enters the back bath through the aperture.
28.9~40.9sWBC analysis
26.2~46.6sOpen the valve V20, the liquid in the RBC front bath enters the back bath through the aperture.
32.1~46.1sRBC analysis
33.9~37.1sThe waste pump LP3 is turned on to drain the DIFF bath.
6-44
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
T126 T125 C34
拭子
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-45
Fluidic System
30~34sThe DIL syringe aspirates 8146uL of diluent

41.3~43The waste pump LP2 is turned on to drain the WBC bath.
40.1~41.1sMeasure HGB reference voltage
6-46
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-47
Fluidic System
44.2~44.7sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles in the WBC bath
43.9~45.4sThe SH syringe cleans the sample preparing channel
6-48
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
T126 T125 C34
拭子
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-49
Fluidic System

45~46.2sThe DIL syringe aspirates 2050uL of diluent
27.7~28sThe ASP syringe generates 2uL of isolating bubbles in the sample probe.
6-50
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
fasten
C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T146 TightlyT79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

PS1
sensor
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-51
Fluidic System
47~48.8sThe SH syringe cleans the sample preparing channel and DIFF bath
46.5~48The waste pump LP2 is turned on to drain the RBC bath.
6-52
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
T126 T125 C34
拭子
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-53
Fluidic System

48.4~49.7sThe DIL syringe is initialized and dispenses 3000uL of diluent into the RBC bath.
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
fasten
C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T146 TightlyT79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-54
Fluidic System
50.9~53sThe SH syringe dispenses 1500uL of diluent into the DIFF bath through the sample preparing channel
51.1~53.1sThe SP syringe is initialized
50.7~52.7sThe LYSE syringe is initialized
53.65~56.5sClean WBC back bath
54~56sClean RBC back bath
56.2~57.1sTurn on and off V11 continuously to generate bubbles in the RBC bath
6-55
Fluidic System
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
C32
PS1
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-56
Fluidic System
55.8~58.2sOpen the valve V26 and waste pump LP3 to drain the vacuum chamber
57.2~59.5sOpen the valve V09 to release the pressure in the vacuum and pressure chambers
57.2~59.3sOpen the pressure pump to release vacuum in the vacuum chamber
SV18
C84
C15 J19-T24-P4-J20
T170 T169 T4
C14
DIL
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
J40-T15-J12
T6
J17-T22-P5-J18
SV17 T2
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
cell
T49
Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06
SV15 detection
Tightly fasten
Transducer
the clamp
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
C26 T134
T43 T17 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41
J23-T42-J24
GP C16
SV14 SV16 T74
J9-T13-J10
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T45
T41
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
SV09
J31-T137-J32
C5
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
SV13 T80
C17
T167
T146 Tightly fasten

C36 C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
the clamp
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T152
T69
C44 C8 C38
T57
T63
T153
DH
SV07
T61
VC
P8-J47
C66 T65
T151 T58
T50 T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C85 C76 SV22
T154
T163 T53
T67
T55
T176-P1-P2-J46-T177-P3
T84
T66
T178
T108
T56
T96
C9
T124
RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20
Hydraulic
T92 T104 C33

sensor
PS1
C32
Blood sensor 1
T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
C54
T179
ASP(100uL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58 C60
T93 T105
LEO(II) lyse
C21 C23
LEO(I) lyse
T144
T87
C86
container
container
T143
LH lyse
container
J29-T101-P7-J30
J27-T89-P6-J28
T141
T142
cover cover
LF1 SV12 SV11
C87
Probe T126 T125 C34
T127
T123
T112
T113
T99
T114 C35
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-57
Fluidic System
6.7.2 Closed Predilute CD Mode Sample Analysis Sequence
The closed predilute CD mode sample analysis sequence is almost the same as whole blood
sequence stated above, the major differences are:
1. Pre-piercing is not needed, so the pre-piercing sequence only involves a probe
descending action.
2. Since the sample of predilute mode has been diluted already before presented to the
analyzer, the aspiration volume is 80uL, half of which is dispensed to the WBC bath, and
the other half is dispensed to the DIFF bath.
3. There is no sample probe swing or cleaning action.
6.7.3 Autoloader Whole Blood CD Mode Sample Analysis
Sequence
The autoloader whole blood CD mode sample analysis sequence is almost the same as the
closed whole blood sequence stated above, the major differences are:
1. The aspirating position is at the autoloader track, not the sample compartment.
2. The pre-piercing sequence of autoloader mode may overlay with the last 10s of the main
analysis sequence
6.7.4 CBC Mode Analysis Sequence
Compared with the CD mode, the CBC mode analysis sequence does not involve fluidic
actions of the DIFF & optical channel, the rest of the sequence is almost the same with that of
the CD mode, with the following differences.
1. Aspiration volume The aspiration volume of whole blood CD mode is 33uL, while that of
the whole blood CBC mode is 24uL. The aspiration volume of predilute CD mode is 80uL,
while that of the predilute CBC mode is 40uL.
2. There is no action involving the DIFF bath, including dispensing of sample, LEO(I) lyse
and LEO(II) lyse, bubble generation of the DIFF bath, cleaning, etc.
3. There is no action involving the flow cell, such as preparing of sample, sheath fluid and
sample flow, sample preparing channel cleaning, etc.
6.8 Function of Fluidic Valves
Name Function
Works with SV03 and SV07 to control the diluent dispensing direction of DIL
SV01
syringe
SV02 Controls the aspiration and dispensing of DIL syringe
6-58
Fluidic System
SV03
syringe
SV04 Works with LYSE syringe to control the aspiration and dispensing of LH lyse
SV05 Works with LYSE syringe to control the aspiration and dispensing of LEO(II) lyse
SV06 Works with LYSE syringe to control the aspiration and dispensing of LEO(I) lyse
SV07
syringe
SV08 Works with the vacuum chamber to flush and drain the flow cell
SV09 Connects the vacuum and pressure chamber
SV10 Controls bubble dispensing of the DIFF bath
SV11 Controls bubble dispensing of the RBC bath
SV12 Controls bubble dispensing of the WBC bath

Works with SH syringe to aspirate or dispense probe cleanser, or clean the
SV13
inside of sample probe
SV14 Controls the aspiration and dispensing actions of the SH syringe
SV15 Works with the SH syringe to prepare sample or clean sample preparing channel
SV16 Works with sheath fluid to drive sample
SV17 Controls the flow and break of sheath fluid
SV18 Waste valve by outlet of the flow cell

Controls the diluent direction for RBC back bath cleaning, connects the back
SV19
bath and diluent container
SV20 RBC back bath control valve, connects the back bath and vacuum chamber
SV21 WBC back bath control valve, connects the back bath and vacuum chamber
Controls the diluent direction for WBC back bath cleaning, connects the back
SV22
bath and diluent container
SV23 WBC waste valve
SV24 RBC waste valve
SV25 Probe wipe waste valve

Vacuum chamber waste valve, drains the vacuum chamber and controls vacuum
SV26
generation
SV27 DIFF waste valve
Sample preparing pinch valve, controls sample preparation and the cleaning
PV28
action after sample preparation
6-59
7 Optical System
7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle

The optical system principle of BC-5390 is based on that of the flow cytometer: when the
stained cells pass the facula detection area under the influence of "Hydrodynamic focusing",
light scatter is produced after exposure of the a cell under light beam, where the forward
scatter reflects the volume of the cell, and the side scatter reflects the complexity of the
nucleus. Therefore, BC-5390 is able to differentiate different cells by collecting and analyzing
the forward scatter and side scatter, and presents the result using 2D scattergram. The optical
system is composed of the laser radiation module and scatter sensors.
7.2 Optical Path and Workflow of the Optical System

The optical path of BC-5390 optical system is shown in Figure 7-1.
13
12
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 7-1 Optical path of BC-5390 optical system
1. Semiconductor laser (670nm) 2. Laser collimating lens

3. Cylindrical lens A 4. Cylindrical lens B
5. Flow cell 6. Posterior collimating lens
7. Light splitter 8. Forward scatter diaphragm
9. Forward scatter focusing lens 10. Forward scatter PD
11. Side scatter diaphragm 12. Side scatter focusing lens
13. Side scatter PD 14. /
The BC-5390optical system uses semiconductor laser (1) as the light source, which emits a
red laser beam of 670nm. The laser beam passes through the collimating lens (2) and gets
collimated, and then adjusted by cylindrical lens A (3) and B (4) which are placed orthogonally,
to form a flat elliptic laser beam of 15um*300um (@13.5%) going through the sample flow (6)
in the center of the flow cell (5).
7-1
Optical System
Figure 7-2 Laser facula through the flow cell
After the sample probe releases the white blood cells treated with reagent, the sheath flow
wraps the cells and makes them pass through the flow cell one by one, as shown in Figure 7-2.
The flat elliptic laser beam irradiates light on each white blood cell passing through the flow cell
(the red line shown in Figure 7-1).
After the light scatter comes out of the flow cell (5), it is collimated by posterior collimating lens
(6) into parallel light, and then split by the light splitter (7) into 2 scatter beams which are the
same in dimension. The forward scatter split by the light splitter passes through a forward
scatter diaphragm (8) and becomes the 2-5 degree scatter, and is then focused on the forward
scatter PD by the forward scatter focusing lens (9); the side scatter split by the light splitter
pass through a side scatter diaphragm (11) and becomes the 8-20 degree scatter, and is then
focused on the side scatter PD by the side scatter focusing lens.
The forward scatter and side scatter are transferred to electric signals by the PD, which are
then processed by the signal processing system based on which the 2D scattergrams are
generated, and thus the 5-part differentiation of white blood cells are achieved.
7.3 Components of the Optical System

The figure below shows the components of BC-5390 optical system, and the name of the
components are listed in Table 7-1.
7-2
Optical System
Figure 7-3 Components of BC-5390 optical system
1 Front optical assembly 7. Side scatter diaphragm

assembly
2 Flow cell measurement 8. Side scatter PD assembly
assembly
3 Rear optical assembly 9. Laser control board
4 Light splitter lens assembly 10. Rear cover assembly
5 Forward scatter diaphragm 11. Base plate assembly
assembly
6 Forward scatter PD assembly 12. /
7.4 Optical System Status Determination

The BC-5390 optical system status is determined using 7um standard particle. The operation
procedures and determination criteria are as follows:
1. Get a vial of 7μm standard particles, mix it by shaking the vial gently, and then dispense
3-4 drops into a 1.5ml centrifugal tube. Dilute the solution in the centrifugal tube to 1ml,
cap the tube and mix it well to prepare the standard particle solution for status
determination, as shown in Figure 7-4;
7-3
Optical System
Figure 7-4 Preparing the 7um standard particle solution
2. Select the venous whole blood mode for sample analysis, and run the 7um standard
particle. After the analysis is completed, select the analysis data in the "Review" screen,
and then click the "Optical" button on top right to go to the optical adjustment screen, as
shown in Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Optical adjustment screen of standard particle
3. Select "Standard Particle Mode", and then click "Calculate". Check if the "FS Gravity
Center Position" falls in the range of 17.6±0.5, and "SS Gravity Center Position"
105.3±1.0. If not, enter the FS peak target (17.6) and SS peak target (105.3) in the
"Peak Target" fields, and then the instrument will automatically calculate the gain. Click
the "Gain Setup" button to apply the gain;
4. At the "Run" screen, run the 7un particle solution again, and then check if the "FS
Gravity Center Position" is 17.6±0.5, and the "SS Gravity Center Position" is 105.3±1.0.
Repeat Step 2-4 until these 2 valves falls in the respective range;
5. If the "FS Gravity Center Position" and "SS Gravity Center Position" of particle 1 meet
the requirements, check if the following requirements are met:
FS 0.1max Width (SD) ≤10.00
SS 0.1max Width (SD) ≤15.21
Check if the FS and SS gains displayed on the "Gain" setup" (Setup>General Setup>Gain)
7-4
Optical System
meet the following requirements:

FS Gain ≤150
SS Gain ≤220
6. If the requirements are met, the optical system status determination is finished, and the
result is Pass. If the requirements are not met, see the next section below.
7.5 Maintenance and Replacement of the Optical

System
 This product contains visible radiation or laser component. When servicing

the product, follow the instructions in this manual to avoid injury of your
eyes.
When the optical system test using standard particle fails or when error occurs, service is
needed. Service of BC-5390 optical system includes maintenance and replacement, where
maintenance refers to the cleaning, wiping procedures when there is no component damaged,
and replacement generally refers to the replacement of the whole optical system when there is
component damaged or maintenance failure (considering the shortage of service tools and the
complexity of the service procedures).
7.5.1 Maintaining the Optical System
The maintenance of optical system is usually used when there are errors like flow cell clog.
See the details below.
 Flow cell exterior wall needs cleaning
 Error presentation: the gravity center in the scattergram descends, FS and SS valves
in the gain setup screen slightly high, and the dots in the scattergram are more
sporadic (but still in a normal dispensing).
 Error confirmation: click "Adjust Laser" at the optical adjustment screen and make
sure the laser is turned off. Open the top cover and right door with a cross-headed
screwdriver, loosen the 6 screws fixing the optical system shielding cover to remove
the cover. Turn on the laser again at the optical adjustment screen. Avoid staring at
the laser beam. Check along the laser beam to see if there is brightened dot on the
exterior wall of the flow cell.
7-5
Optical System
Spot of light on
the exterior wall
of the flow cell.
Figure 7-6 Brightened dot on the exterior wall of the flow cell
 Troubleshooting: if evident brightened dot is found, wipe the place with dust-free
cloth dipped with anhydrous alcohol until the dot disappears.
 Note:
1. Avoid staring at the laser beam in the maintenance process;
2. Do not touch the radiation-proof diaphragm or damage the flow cell assembly while
wiping;
3. Check if there is any evident brightened dot on the exterior wall of the flow cell after
wiping.
 Flow cell interior wall needs cleaning
 Error presentation: abnormal DIFF scattergram. The figures below show examples of
abnormal scattergrams of normal blood sample and standard particle.
Figure 7-7 Scattergram of normal blood sample when the flow cell interior wall needs
cleaning
Figure 7-8 Scattergram of standard particle when the flow cell interior wall needs
cleaning
7-6
Optical System
 Error confirmation: click "Adjust Laser" at the optical adjustment screen and make
sure the laser is turned off. Open the top cover and right door with a cross-headed
screwdriver, loosen the 6 screws fixing the optical system shielding cover to remove
the cover. Turn on the laser again at the optical adjustment screen. Avoid staring at
the laser beam. Check if there is brightened dot on the interior wall of the flow cell. At
the meantime, place a white paper before the side scatter PD assembly, and check if
there is a ring in the focal facula, shown as follows:
Flow cell interior wall needs

cleaning (exterior wall also needs
cleaning in this example).
Figure 7-9 Brightened dot on the interior wall of the flow cell
The focal facula before the side scatter

PD assembly with an optical ring
Figure 7-10 The optical ring before the side scatter PD assembly
 Troubleshooting: if the flow cell interior wall needs cleaning, do the following to run
the self-maintenance program of the analyzer.
1. Click in the "Work Center" area at the right side of the IPU, and select "Service";
2. At the "Maintenance" screen, select "Soak DIFF Bath";
3. Follow the prompts to perform the automatic probe cleanser maintenance.
4. After the maintenance (about 20 minutes), switch to the "Run" screen, and follow the
steps prescribed in Chapter 7.4 "Optical System Status Determination" to run the 7um
standard particle, and check if the results fall into the reference ranges.
If the automatic maintenance does not solve the problem, and after removing the cover,
brightened dots are spotted on the interior wall of the optical system flow cell, follow below
steps to manually clean the flow cell with probe cleanser,
7-7
Optical System
1. Follow the steps described in "Error confirmation": open the top cover and right door,
loosen the 6 screws fixing the optical system shielding cover to remove the cover.
2. Take out 2 clean S-50 tubes or 3350 silicone tubes (length: about 10cm). Connect one
tube to the newly unpacked syringe, and the other one to the waste outlet connector of
the flow cell. Snip the plastic cable tie using a pair of diagonal pliers, and then remove
the flow cell tray using a screwdriver. Unplug the sheath fluid inlet tube, and plug the
tube which is connected to the syringe;
3. Draw the diluent from the flow cell assembly with the syringe, and then put the other end
of the tube connecting to the waste outlet into a small beaker. Inject a certain volume of
probe cleanser with the syringe, and make sure it is visible that the probe cleanser is
flowing into the flow cell.
Figure 7-11 Manual probe cleanser maintenance
4. After the flow cell is fully filled with probe cleanser, wait 10-15 minutes. Slightly draw the
fluid with the syringe, and check if the brightened dot on the interior wall disappears;
5. If the dot disappears, draw out the probe cleanser out of the flow cell assembly, and then
reset the tubing. In the PC software, click Menu>Service>Maintenance>Clean>Flow cell
to perform the flow cell cleaning until the "DIFF Particles Total" of the background count
"Special Info." becomes less than 50 (place the cursor on the background count result of
the "Review" screen, and then right-click the mouse to show the "Special Info.");
6. If the brightened dot still exist after manual cleaning, the optical system needs to be
replaced. See the next section for details.
 Note:
1. Generally speaking, if the scattergram distribution is similar to Figure 7 or it is judged
that the flow cell interior wall needs cleaning, perform automatic maintenance of the
flow cell first, and do not remove the cover for check until the automatic maintenance
fails or does not take effect;
2. Wear proper personal protective equipment during manual cleaning, and wear the
PVC gloves properly; do not drop the probe cleanser on the instrument or on the
clothes/skin of any people.
 Flow cell clog
 Error presentation: when flow cell clog occurs, the valve pressure ascends, and the
"Flow cell clog" error is reported by the instrument.
 Error confirmation: the error report of the instrument;
 Troubleshooting: click the "Remove Error" button to see if the error can be removed.
7-8
Optical System
If yes, check if the fluid in the flow cell can flow out from the waste outlet smoothly
while pulling and pushing the syringe (as instructed by the manual maintenance
procedure); If not, replace the optical system as instructed by the next section.
7.5.2 Replacing the Optical System
If there is component damaged or maintenance failure, optical system replacement is needed.

Do as follows:
1. Perform the shutdown procedure, and then power off the analyzer;
2. Remove the top cover and right door of the analyzer;
Figure 7-12 Removal of the top cover and the right door
3. Snip the plastic cable tie fixing the flow cell tray with a pair of diagonal pliers, and then
unscrew the 2 M3x8 cross-recessed panhead screws (with washers) fixing the flow cell
tray with a cross-headed screwdriver to remove the tray;
4. Wear a pair of disposal PVC gloves, and then remove the T connector of the
commutation assembly and the tubing of SV18 valve in turn (marked by the arrows in the
figure below). If there is any fluid leakage, wipe it with tissue or wet cloth immediately to
avoid corrosion to the instrument;
7-9
Optical System
Figure 7-13 Removing the flow cell tray and tubing of the T connector
5. Get a clean S-50 tube or 3350 silicone tube of about 10cm, and connect one end to the
sheath fluid inlet, and the other end to the sample inlet. Connect the tube that is removed
from the SV18 valve to the sample outlet (marked by red arrows in the figure);
6. Disconnect the optical system signal transmission cable and control wire from the data
board;
7. Unscrew the 6 inner hexagon screws fixing the optical system shielding cover with a
screwdriver, and then remove the 4 M4x8 cross-recessed panhead screws (with
washers) from the base plate;
Figure 7-14 Screws on the base plate
8. Remove the whole optical system from the instrument, and install the shielding cover
back to the removed system, and put them into the packing box;
9. Install the new optical system based on the reversed procedure above.
7-10
Optical System
7.6 Optical System Gain Calibration

Optical system gain calibration is necessary when the maintenance or replacement of the
optical system finished, the analyzer is left unused for a long time, the ambient environment is
changed, or the analyzer has experienced a long-distance transportation, in order to make
sure the optical system can work properly. The calibration should be performed as instructed
below:
1. Select the venous whole blood mode (open-vial) for sample analysis, and run the R&D
control. After the analysis is completed, select the analysis data in the "Review" screen,
and then click the "Optical" button on top right to go to the optical adjustment screen,
2. Select "Control Mode" and click "Calculate" as shown in Figure7-15. The "FS Gravity
Center Position" of particle 2 should fall in ±1.94 of the control target, and the "SS
Gravity Center Position" should fall in ±2.6 of the control target. If one or both of the
valves are out of range, perform the next step of gain calibration.
Figure 7-15 Optical adjustment screen of control
3. Enter the FS and SS gravity center targets of the control into the "Particle 2 Peak target"
fields, and then the analyzer automatically calculate the gain valves needed, which are
displayed in the "Gain" column. Click the "Gain Setup" button, and the FS and SS gain
will be updated to the new gain valves.
4. Run the control again, and go to the "Optical" adjustment screen. Perform Step 2 to
confirm. If the valves are still out of range, repeat Step 1-3 until they fall in the respective
range.
7-11
8 Hardware System
8.1 Overview
This chapter introduces functions of the hardware system and its interfaces. The hardware
system includes data flow, user interface, control flow, power system, structure and
connections by logic.
Hardware
Interconnectio
Laser scatter
method n of
applications
Bath
Laser diode Signal
Impedance adjustment
HGB sensor Signal collection
method End user
Optical Data upload
sensor input Network
cables
Colorimetric Embedded
method Keyswitch
main control
system End user Indicators
platform output Buzzers
Data stream
Barcode
scanner
Interface to
peripherals
Structure
and
interconnecti User interface
Movement
mechanism
on
drive and detection
Motor
Electromagnets
Fluidic parts
Valves drive and detection
Pumps
Float switches
Heater
Fan
Secondary
Heat engineering control
Temperature parts drive and platform Power
detector detection monitoring
Pressure
detector
Power switch
Barcode scanner
Grid
System status electricity
Photocouplers
monitoring
Grid
Power electricity
conversion input
Fluid detection
Control stream Power system
Figure 8-1 The logical diagram of hardware system
8-1
Hardware System
8.2 Analog Board
8.2.1 Overview
The analog board drives sensors, amplifies, filters and sorts primary signals of the sensors into
signals that meets A/D input requirement. Besides, the analog board supplies power to all
analog boards. Functional diagram of the analog board is as follows:
RBC/PLT RBC/PLT
RBC/PLT signal adjustment
sensor RBC/PLT HOLE
RBC/PLT aperture constant Constant current source

current source and zapping and zapping control
control module
WBC WBC
WBC signal adjustment
sensor WBC HOLE
WBC aperture constant Zapping control

current source and zapping
HGB control module
Gaining control
HGB Connector
sensor HGB signal adjustment HGB
to digital
main
Drive control
Drive and
HGB transmitting tube control board
buffer
constant current drive
module
A±12V、AC120V Monitored signal

Analog power
Power supply adjustment
adjustment module
A±12V module
SS SS
preamplificatio SS adjustment channel
n board
FS FS
preamplificatio FS adjustment channel FS direct current
n board background
Laser Switch control signal

control
board Laser diode drive current signal monitoring
Figure 8-2 Functional diagram of the analog board
8.2.2 Function
The analog board can be divided into 7 modules: analog power adjusting module, voltage
monitoring module, HGB channel module, impedance channel module, optical channel
module, drive buffering module, and pressure monitoring module.
Analog power adjusting module:
 This module filters the A±12V voltage and transforms it into the 5V/-5V analog
voltage required by the analog section; meanwhile it doubling rectifies the A+12V
voltage, and stabilizes it into 56V direct current.
Voltage monitoring module:
8-2
Hardware System
 This module converts level of the voltages to be monitored on the board to the level
that can be received by AD (0~5V), and makes the impedance fulfill requirement of
AD conversion.
 The monitored signals include: WBC/RBC aperture voltage, +/-12V, 56V zapping
power and FS direct current background.
HGB channel module:
 This module drives HGB sensor, amplifies and adjusts HGB signals.
Impedance channel module:
 This module drives the RBC/PLT and WBC sensors, amplifies and adjusts RBC/PLT
and WBC impedance signals. Besides, it provides counting bath zapping function.
Optical channel module:
 This module amplifies and adjusts FS/SS and SF signals input from the
preamplification board.
Pressure monitoring module:
 This module drives the pressure sensor, coverts pressure/vacuum change into
voltage change, and amplifies the voltage.
Drive buffering module:
 This module converts TTL control signals input from external boards into actuating
signals with certain driving capability.
8.2.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the analog board is as follows.
Table 8-1 Modules of the analog board
Module No. Description

P1 Impedance channel module
P2 Pressure monitoring module
P3 Analog power adjusting module
P4 HGB channel module
P5 Voltage monitoring module
P6 Optical channel module
P7 Drive buffering module
8-3
Hardware System
P3
P6
P4
P5 P7
P2
P1
Figure 8-3 PCBA structure of the analog board (top)
8-4
Hardware System
8.2.4 Interfaces
 Interface layout and description
J24 J5 J4 J3 J6
J8
HGB drive
and Optical signal amplication
Power adjustment
amplication
module
J9
Control
Monitoring signal signal drive
adjustment circuit circuit
Shielding area
Atmospheric J1
pressure Impedance Constant
regulation pre- current Impedance J7
circuit amplification source amplification
circuit circuit
J2
Figure 8-4 Analog board sockets
Table 8-2 Analog board interfaces
Position No. Function

J1 Interface of the analog board and
RBC/PLT sensor
J2 Interface of the analog board and WBC
sensor
J3 Analog signal interface of the analog
board and optical preamplification board
J4 Interface of the analog board and HGB
sensor
J5 Interface of analog power
J24 Interface of zapping power
J6 Interface of the analog board and laser
control board
J7 High speed analog signal interface of
8-5
Hardware System
the analog board and digital control

board
J8 Low speed analog signal interface of the
analog board and digital control board
J9 Digital signal interface of the analog
board and digital control board
8.2.5 Indicators and test points
The functions of the indicators are listed in the following table.
Table 8-3 Functions of the indicators in the analog board
Indicator Function
D47 Indicator of analog +12V, normal
status: on
D48 Indicator of analog -12V, normal
status: on
D49 Indicator of analog +5V, normal status:
on
D50 Indicator of analog -5V, normal status:
on
The functions of main test points in the board are listed in the following table.
Table 8-4 Test points in the analog board
Test Printed label Function Note

point
TP16 2.5V Reference voltage in the Normal voltage range:
pressure monitoring circuit 2.4V~2.6V
TP22 12V Test point of 12V power Normal voltage range:
11.4V~12.6V
TP26 N12V Test point of -12V power Normal voltage range:
-11.4V~-12.6V
TP23 5V Test point of 5V power Normal voltage range:
4.75V~5.25V
TP27 N5V Test point of -5V power Normal voltage range:
-4.75V~-5.25V
TP1 56V Voltage test point of impedance Normal voltage range:
8-6
Hardware System
channel constant-current 47V~60V

source
TP48 VCONST_MON 56V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
1.8V~2.2V
TP44 12VM 12V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
2.2V~2.6V
TP47 N12VM -12V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
1.2V~1.5V
TP37 HGB Output signal of HGB channel /
TP2 RBC Output signal of RBC channel /
TP9 WBC Output signal of WBC channel /
Vacuum monitoring output /
TP20 NP
signal
Pressure monitoring output /
TP21 PP
signal
TP49 FS Output signal of FS channel /
TP61 SS Output signal of SS channel /
8.2.6 Troubleshooting
Table 5 lists the frequent errors and solutions of the analog board to guide the troubleshooting
actions. The error here refers to hardware error only, the same error situation caused by the
fluidic, optical, reagent or software systems (for which you can refer to the related chapters for
solution) are excluded.
Before troubleshooting analog board errors, the following checks shall be performed.
1. Check if the power output is normal;
2. Check if the wires are firmly connected to the analog board; if the wire No. and socket
No. match; and if the wires are damaged.
3. Check if the power input of the board is normal; and check if the indicators are normal
according to Table 3.
4. Restart the analyzer to see if the error is removed.
If all the above actions are done, and the error still exists, you may go on to troubleshoot the
error as instructed in the following table.
 Be sure to wear antistatic gloves when assembling and disassembling the

board, and always hold on the edge of board.
 When using multimeter or other equipments to test a component, make sure

not to touch other components or wires to avoid board damage caused by
short circuit.
8-7
Hardware System
Table 8-5 Errors and troubleshooting list of the analog board
Error Error Diagnosis

No. Cause
Consequence
The following situations can all be
diagnosed as analog error:
"+12V analog
 D47 indicator turns off
voltage
1 Circuit error  The voltage of test point TP22 (12V) is
abnormal" is
outside 11.4～12.6V
reported
 The voltage of test point TP44 (12VM)
is outside 2.2V~2.6V
"-12V analog
 D48 indicator turns off
voltage
2 Circuit error  The voltage of test point TP26 (N12V)
abnormal" is
is outside -11.4～-12.6V
reported
 The voltage of test point TP47 (N12VM)
is outside 1.2V~1.5V
diagnosed as luminotron error:
 The luminotron is off, the level of
TP72(HGBLED_N) is low (about 0V)
 The luminotron is on, the HGB voltage
can be adjustable along with the gain,
HGB luminotron
3 but when the gain is adjusted to its
error
upper limit, the HGB voltage is still
lower than 3.2V. The situation suggests
the aging of the luminotron (when fluidic
problems are excluded)
"HGB Blank  The error is removed after replacing the
Voltage HGB assembly
abnormal" is The following situations can all be
reported diagnosed as analog board drive circuit
error:
 The luminotron is off, and the
HGB luminotron TP31(HGB_ON_N) is of high level
4
drive circuit error (3.3V) when running analysis sequence
 After replacing the HGB assembly, the
luminotron is still off
 The HGB luminotron is off even after it
has been replaced
HGB HGB voltage is 0; the voltage of test point
5 photoelectric cell TP38 (HGB1) is positive and greater than
error (usually the 0.6V. The error is removed after replacing
8-8
Hardware System
anode and HGB assembly.

cathode are
incorrectly
connected)
diagnosed as circuit error:
 HGB voltage is higher than 4.8V when
the gain is at its minimum
 The voltage of test point TP37 (HGB) is
3.2~4.8V, but the HGB voltage
displayed on the screen is not within
the range
6 HGB circuit error
 HGB voltage is lower than 3.2V when
the gain is at its maximum, and
replacing the HGB bath fails to solve
the problem
 D49 (+5V) indicator is off
 The voltage of test point
TP40(VCONST_HGB) is outside 2.4～
2.9V
Error of the
HGB gain digital The gain changes from 50 to 200, but the
7
calibration fails potentiometer on HGB tested is unchanged
the board
 The voltage of 56V constant current
source is outside 47 ～ 60V, or the
voltage of TP48 (VCONST_MON) is
outside 1.8V~2.2V
Constant current
 The voltage difference between pin 2
"Aperture source
and pin 3 of J1 is 12~18V when running
voltage error/monitoring
8 RBC analysis, but error is reported by
abnormal" is circuit
the analyzer. This situation suggests
reported error/power
monitoring circuit error.
source error
 Replace the counting bath with 20K
resistor, if the voltage tested by the two
ends of the resistor is outside 11.4～
13.2V, which means error occurs to the
constant current source.
"Forward The following situations can all be
9 scatter blank Circuit error diagnosed as circuit error:
voltage  The scattergram is normal while
8-9
Hardware System
abnormal" is "Forward scatter blank voltage

reported abnormal" is reported
 The voltage of test point TP49(FS) is
not 1.5 ～ 1.9V when analysis is not
running
Confirm as per the following procedure:
1) Disconnect all wires connected to the
analog board and start up the analyzer, if the
error is removed, then short circuit of analog
board power source can be excluded; check
Automatically
Short circuit of other wires and components connected to
10 power off at
power source the analog board.
booting up
2) Disconnect all wires connected to the
analog board and start up the analyzer, if the
error persists, then short circuit of analog
board power source can be concluded, and
the analog board should be replaced.
8.3 Digital Control Board (including CPU module)
8.3.1 Overview
The digital control board is consisted of the bottom plate and CPU module connected to each
other via socket, its structure is as follows:
Buckle plate
socket2
60pin+60 pin
AM1808 main control Buckle plate
module socket3
80pin
Signal
connection cable
Analog board Pinaster main control board
Figure 8-5 Digital control board sockets
8.3.2 Function
Basic functions of the digital control circuit are:

1. Data processing: receiving data collected by the analog circuit, providing operation
system and software running platform for data processing,
2. System control: providing operation system and software running platform for scheduling
and monitoring of the analyzer operations.
8-10
Hardware System
3. User interacting: providing hardware platform for user interaction.
8.3.3 Structure
Optical system
Volumetric board
J78 J79 J81 J8
socket 5V input
(J11)
Reserved control fpga
Temperature
socket for analog configurati
control socket
J86 communication on socket
Pinaster main control board

Reserved FPGA CAN Volumetric board Key board
interface socket socket
Valve control socket Analog board socket

USB-J
×2
J77
AM1808 CPU module

60p
USB-J
socket
×2
FPGA 80p
U2 socket
Analog board
7cm
Analog ADC circuit
RJ45-J(J1)
RJ45 DDR2
60p
-J
socket
RS232
RJ45 DC/DC DB9 serial
circuit
J85 -J port
J65
EEPROMci
6cm rcuit RTC
circuit
LCD backlighting
fpga-LCD display socket cpu-LCD display socket socket Touch screen
interface
Figure 8-6 Layout of the digital control board
8.3.4 Interfaces
Table 8-6 Hardware interfaces of the Pinaster main control board
No. Position No. Function
1. J11 5V power input
2. J82 FPGA JTAG debug interface
3. J1 100M Ethernet interface
4. J78 Indicator and key board socket
5. J79 Door detection and aspirate key socket
6. J80 Volumetric board socket
7. J81 Drive board socket
8. J8 Autoloading board socket
9. J85 High speed analog signal socket
10. J86 Low speed analog signal socket
11. J77 Analog control signal socket
8-11
Hardware System
 Indicator
Board Position No. Function Description

CPU D1 Power indicator Indicator keeps on: power supply
module works OK
Bottom D44 Power indicator Indicator keeps on: power supply
plate works OK
Bottom D2 FPGA indicator If D2 flickers, FPGA is working
plate normally
Bottom D6 Network connection If the indicator is green, the
plate status indicator connection is OK; if it flickers, there
are data in transmission
Bottom D7 Network speed Yellow, on when the speed is
plate indicator 100Mbps, off when the speed is
10Mbps.
 Test point
Board Position No. Function Description

CPU module TP1 Test point of 1.8V power Normal voltage range: 1.8V±5%
Bottom plate TP1 Test point of 1.8V power Normal voltage range: 1.8V±5%
Bottom plate TP36 Test point of 5V power Normal voltage range: 5V±5%
Bottom plate TP39-43 GND Normal voltage range: 0V±5%
Table 8-7 Errors and troubleshooting list of the digital control board
Error Error Diagnosis

No. Cause
Consequence
1. 1) Disconnect all wires connected to the digital
control board and start up the analyzer, if the
Short error is removed, then short circuit of digital
Automatically
circuit of control board power source can be excluded;
1 power off at
power check other wires and components connected to
booting up
source the digital control board.
2. Pull out all the cables connected to the digital
main control board, and restart the analyzer. If
the problem remains, then it is caused by digital
8-12
Hardware System
main control board short circuit. Replace the

digital main control board.
The PC is not 1.Replace the PC to see if the error is removed
Hardwar
2 connected to 2.Observe indicator D6 to see if it is off
e error
the network 3.Check if the network cable is properly connected
4.Replace the board to see if the error is removed
1. Observe the FPGA indicator D2, if it does not
Fail to collect FPGA
3 flicker, then the FPGA is not working normally.
analog data error
2. Check the connection wire to the analog board.
3. Check if the analog board is OK.
8.4 Drive Board
8.4.1 Overview
The drive board is an auxiliary control board, its control commands come from upper modules,
such as digital control board. The drive board analyzes control commands from upper modules
and transmits them into bottom layer control signals to realize drive control of the moving parts
(sample collection assembly, syringe assembly), heat engineering parts (heater) and fluidic
parts (valves, pumps); it gathers temperature and position information of the analyzer or its
components via the sensors, and sends some or all of the information to the upper modules as
necessary. Its functional diagram is as follows:
8-13
Hardware System
Upper layer control

system
Command and data

transmission
Movement Heat
mechanism engineering
drive and parts drive and
detection detection Step motors
Heater
Valves
Pumps
Control
Detectors
platform (Pressure and temperature etc)
Photocouplers
Float
Switches
Others
System status
Fluidic parts
information
drive
monitoring
Drive board Peripherals
Figure 8-7 Functional diagram of 3106 power drive board
8.4.2 Function
The functions of 3106 power drive board are:

1. Main control module: this module is consisted of the ARM+FPGA structure, it analyzers
upper layer commands, drives the execution parts, collects and sends reference data of
the sensors to the digital control board, so that it may control the power of the analyzer
effectively.
2. Driving motor: it drives the sample collection mechanism and the syringe assembly via
the drive motor.
3. Moving mechanism detection (photocoupler detection): detects mechanism position via
sensors.
4. Driving valves and pumps: it drives valves and pumps so that samples or reagents may
flow in the fluidic system.
5. Driving heater: it forms a closed-loop control system with the temperature sensor to
provide proper temperature for operation of the components or reaction of the reagents.
6. Driving the fan: it drives the fan to eliminate heat.
7. Temperature detection: it detects the temperature of components, reagents and the
environment via temperature sensors.
8. Pressure detection: it detects output pressure of the pressure sensor to control pressure
8-14
Hardware System
generation of the gas system and monitor the pressure.

9. Fluid detection: it detects the electrical level signal of the fluid detection board to monitor
if there is any reagent.
10. Float switch detection: it detects the on/off status of the float switch to monitor the
full/empty status of waste container and diluent container.
11. Voltage detection: monitors the voltage of the board itself.
12. Parameter storage: it stores all types of calibration parameters so that necessary
information can be saved when power-fail occurs.
13. Power module :it realizes the conversion from 12V to 5V or 3.3V.
8.4.3 Structure
See Table 8-8 and Figure 8-9 for the modules of 3106 power drive board.
Table 8-7 Modules of power drive board
No. Module
P1 Motor drive module
P2 Heater drive module
P3 Moving mechanism detection (photocoupler detection) module
P4 Float switch detection module
P5 Temperature detection module
P6 Power module: (A: 5V and 12V; B: 3.3V)
P7 Fluid detection module
P8 Fan drive module
P9 Valve drive module
P10 Voltage detection module: (A: 12V detection; B: 24V detection)
P11 Pump drive module
P12 Parameter storage module
P13 Main control module
8-15
Hardware System
P6-A P5 P4 P3 P2
P7
P8
P9 P1
P10-A
P11
P12 P13 P6-B P10-B
Figure 8-8 Modules of power drive board
8.4.4 Interfaces
Table 8-8 Interfaces of power drive board
Position No. Interface
J2
Valve drive interface
J3
J4 Pump drive interface

D5V and P12V power input
J6
interface
J7 Fluid detection board interface
J8 Analog signal interface
J9 On/off detection interface
J10
Photocoupler detection interface
J11
J13 Interface to data board
J14 Heating drive interface
8-16
Hardware System
J15 P24V power input interface
J16
J17
Motor drive interface
J18
J19
See Table 8-10 and 8-11 for indicators and test points of the power drive board.
Table 8-9 Indicators of power drive board
Function Module LED_1 LED_2 Function
Sample collection
D51 D61
assembly X motor
Sample collection
D52 D62
assembly Y motor LED_1: flickers when there
is motor pulse output; off
ASP motor D53 D63
Motor when no output pulse.
indicator SP motor D54 D64 LED_2: on when the
residual step of motors is
SH motor D55 D65 not zero, which means the
motors are still working; off
DIL motor D56 D66
when the actions are done.
LYSE motor D57 D67
LC syringe motor D58 D68
P24V_LED D98 /
P12V_LED D97 / The LED is on when the

Power
power channel works
indicator
VCC_LED(5V) D96 / normally, and vice versa.
VDD_LED(3.3V) D99 /
HT1 D81 /
Heating When the heating drive is
drive HT2 D82 / working, the LED is on; and
indicator vice versa.
HT3 D83 /
When FPGA is running

FPGA
FPGA_LED D94 / normally, the indicator
indicator
flickers; and vice versa.
8-17
Hardware System
D88: when photocoupler

/ D87 / status changes, the
indicator flickers and then
turns off;
Photocoupl D87: when photocoupler
er indicator status changes, the
/ D88 / indicator shows the last
photocoupler status. Off
when being blocked; on
when not blocked.
When MCU is running
MCU
MCU_LED D91 / normally, the indicator
indicator
flickers; and vice versa.
When the fluid detection
Fluid
board and MCU board are
detection
LIQ D95 / not properly connected, the
board
indicator turns on; and vice
indicator
versa.
 Test point
Power drive board has a complicated circuit, so there are many test points. Here we only list
some critical test points.
Table 8-10 Critical test points of power drive board
Test point Printed label Function Note
TP1 VCC 5V test point Normal voltage range 4.75V-5.25V
TP2 GND Ground test point Normal voltage range: 0V-0.2V
TP3 VDD 3.3V test point Normal voltage range: 3.2V-3.4V
TP5 1V2 1.2V test point Normal voltage range: 1.1V-1.3V
TP6 2V5 2.5V test point Normal voltage range: 2.4V~2.6V
TP7 P12V 12V test point Normal voltage range: 10.8V-13.2V
TP9 P24V 24V test point Normal voltage range: 21.6V-26.4V
8-18
Hardware System
This chapter introduces the troubleshooting process of the drive board based on its modules
and structure. The following preparations must be done before troubleshooting.
1. Check if the power supply of the analyzer is OK.
2. Check if the peripheral parts (motors, valves, and pumps), sensors (photocouplers,
temperature sensors), wires and other accessories related to the drive board are OK.
3. Check if the wires are firmly connected to the ports.
4. Restart the analyzer to see if the error is removed.
If the cause of the error still cannot be located, continue with error troubleshooting as
instructed in the following table.
Table 8-11 Troubleshooting Method of the power drive board
Error
No. Cause Error Diagnosis Note
Type
The following situations can be
concluded as power drive board
Before troubleshooting
errors:
errors of other power
12V 1. Indicator D97 turns off;
Circuit modules that are related
1 power 2. Voltage of TP7 is outside
error to the drive board, be
error 11.4V-12.6V;
sure to check if the
3. Electrical components
power supply is OK.
connected to 12V power module
are burnt out.
The following situations can be
concluded as drive board errors: The troubleshooting
Error of
1. When executing motor running method above can be
the
command, indicators D51 and used for modules with
sample
D61 turn off. indicators, like the main
collection Circuit
2 2. Components of the drive circuit control module, heating
assembly error
are burnt out. module, photocoupler
X
3. The components are not burnt detection module, motor
direction
out, but after replacing motor and module and fluid
motor
wire, the motor still fails to run as detection module.
expected.
The following situations can be The troubleshooting
concluded as drive board errors: method above can be
Pump Circuit 1. Components of the drive circuit used for modules
3
errors error are burnt out. without indicators, like
2. The components are not burnt the float switch detection
out, but after replacing motor and module, fan drive
8-19
Hardware System
wire, the motor still fails to run as module, temperature

expected. detection module and
pump drive module.
8.5 Autoloading Board
8.5.1 Overview
The autoloading board realizes sample feeding, mixing and barcode scanning.
8.5.2 Function
1. Driving step motors

The autoloading board drives the following 5 step motors:
1) Mix mechanism X motor
2) Mix mechanism Z motor
3) Mix motor
4) X loading motor
5) Y feeding motor
The step motor drive is bipolar constant current half-step drive, the position of each step motor
is detected by the corresponding position sensor.
2. Electromagnet control
The electromagnet controls the opening of the sample compartment (manual closing).
3. Built-in barcode scanner control
The built-in barcode scanner reads tube barcodes and tube rack barcodes. The autoloading
board controls the built-in barcode scanner via MCU. The MCU communicates with the built-in
barcode scanner (UART) via serial port 1.
4. Position sensor and micro-switch status detection
There are 13 position sensors and 1 micro-switch in the autoloading board. Status detection of
position sensors and micro-switch is done by FPGA, the MCU inquires about the storage
status of the FPGA when necessary.
5. Parameter storage
Due to the production and installation deviation of the mix mechanism, initial position of the X
motor and mix motor of the mix mechanism need to be adjusted, the position parameters after
the adjustment are stored in the autoloading board.
8-20
Hardware System
8.5.3 Structure
Figure 8-9 The autoloading board
8.5.4 Interfaces
Table 8-12 List of autoloading board interfaces
Interfaces Function Pin number Description

J3 Electromagnet interface 2 /
J5 Power interface 6 /
8-21
Hardware System
Mix mechanism sensor

J6 20
interface
Feed mechanism sensor
J7 20
interface 1
Feed mechanism sensor
J8 20
interface 2
MCU configuration /
J11 10
interface
J12 Communication interface 4 /
Sample loading mechanism /
J14 8
motor interface
Mix mechanism X and Z /
J15 8
motors control interface
J16 Mix motor interface 4 /
Built-in barcode scanner /
P1 15
interface
Table 8-13 Lists of autoloading board indicators
Indicator Description
D3 12V power indicator, on when the 12V power is normal
D4 5V power indicator, on when the 5V power is normal
D5 3.3V power indicator, on when the 3.3V power is normal
D25 MCU working indicator, flickers every 0.5s when MCU works as normal
D26 FPGA working indicator, flickers every 0.5s when FPGA works as normal
Table 8-14 Lists of autoloading board test points
No. Name Pin position Description

1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 The clock output signal of 24.4545M crystal
oscillator, FPGA working clock
2 TP2 PIN47 of U2 RD signal of MCU
3 TP3 PIN62 of U2 WR signal of MCU
4 TP4 PIN10 of U2 ALE signal of MCU
5 TP5 PIN28 of U2 FPGA reset signal
6 TP6 PIN5 of J1 FPGA configuration starting signal
7 TP7 VCC +5V DC voltage(5±0.25V)
8 TP8 12V0 +12V DC voltage(+12±1.2V)
9 TP9 24V0 +24V DC voltage(+24±1.2V)
10 TP10 VDD +3.3V DC voltage(+3.3±0.15V)
11 TP11 GND
12 TP12 GND
8-22
Hardware System
13 TP13 1V5 +1.5V DC voltage(1.5±0.05V)

14 TP15 TUBE Tube detection photocoupler output signal (>0.4V
when blocked, <0.2V when not blocked)
15 TP18 PIN3 of X2 The clock output signal of 24.4545M crystal
oscillator, MCU working clock
16 TP21 PIN12 of U16 Feed mechanism Y motor step impulse signal
17 TP23 PIN12 of U18 Feed mechanism X motor step impulse signal
18 TP24 PIN12 of U22 Mix mechanism Z motor step impulse signal
19 TP25 PIN12 of U23 Mix mechanism X motor step impulse signal
20 TP26 PIN12 of U24 Mix motor step impulse signal
Error possibility of the autoloading board is low, and the errors can be troubleshooted with
reference to troubleshooting methods of the power drive board. The frequent errors during
autoloading process are introduced as follows.
Table 8-15 Troubleshooting the autoloading assembly
No. Error Type Cause Error Diagnosis Note
1. Make sure the analyzer is

electrified, and the sample
compartment door is closed, test
the voltage between the black and
The
white lines of the photocoupler
Failure of the mechanical
terminal, the voltage shall be
sample structure of
higher than 3V; open the door
compartment the
manually and test the voltage
door sensor, compartment
Sample again, the voltage shall be lower
or the door,
1 compartment than 0.2V. If not, the photocoupler
electromagnet especially
door error is damaged and must be replaced.
cannot the spring is
2. If the photocoupler is normal,
withdraw due the major
press the aspirate key and see if
to excessive cause of
the electromagnet moves. If it
resistance. compartment
does move, but the door is not
door error.
opened, the mechanical structure
of the door of damaged, and the
door spring must be reinstalled or
replaced.
8-23
Hardware System
Barcode
scanner setup Make sure the barcode scanner
error; setup (code system, digits) is
improper correct; check if the barcode is
pasting properly pasted, the barcode label
Barcode
position of shall lay at least 16mm from the
2 scanning /
barcode; poor tube bottom; check if the scanner
error
barcode lens is cover by dust or other stuff;
quality; and analyze the barcode quality to
improper see if there are spots or breaks, or
position of the the contrast is too low.
scanner, etc.
Failure of left
or right Y
1. Check if the photocouplers are
photocoupler;
Left or right damaged as stated above;
the block
Y 2. If the photocouplers are normal,
3 plate of Y /
photocoupler the error is cause by its block
photocoupler
error plate, which must be adjusted or
cannot move
replaced.
with feeding
of the tubes.
When X
direction 1. Check if the tube rack presses
loading is the micro-switch; The
done, valid 2. If yes, check if the micro-switch micro-switch
X direction signal of is valid. When the micro-switch is and its
4
loading error micro-switch pressed, the voltage between its connection
cannot be two ends is 0V; when it is not line must be
detected, and pressed, the voltage shall be checked.
then the error higher than 3V.
is reported.
8.6 Laser Control Board
8.6.1 Overview
The laser control board controls the laser so that it can emit stable laser with proper intensity.
8.6.2 Function
The functions of the laser control board are: power adjusting, laser drive current monitoring
and laser power control.
8-24
Hardware System
Power adjusting: this module filters the ±12V power from the analog board, the ripple after the
adjustment is lower than 100mV.
Laser drive current monitoring: measures the working current of laser, and sends the result to
analog board for monitoring.
Laser power control: laser control board controls the laser using constant power control
method, the photoelectric detector inside the laser monitors its output power real-time, and the
monitoring result forms a closed-loop system via negative feedback to realize constant power
output. The power is controlled by adjusting the potentiometer VR1; it shall be within the range
3mW~5 mW.
Control signal Laser constant power unit Laser

(Closed-loop control unit) （HL6714G）
Power
Monitored Laser drive current
regulation
pressure monitoring module
(π form filter)
A±12V
Laser control board
Figure 8-10 Function diagram of laser control board
8.6.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the laser control board is as follows.
Table 8-16 Modules of the laser control board

P1 Power source adjustment
P2 Laser drive current monitoring
P3 Laser constant power control
8-25
Hardware System
P3 P2
P1
Figure 8-11 The PCBA structure of the laser control board (top)
8.6.4 Interfaces
The laser control board has two external interfaces, J1 to analog board and J2 to the laser.
See the following figure.
Figure 8-12 Interfaces of laser control board
8-26
Hardware System
Table 8-17 Definition of J1
PIN Definition Description I/O Level

1 AVSS -12V analog power I -12V
2 AGND Analog ground Ｏ 0
3 LASER Laser drive current Ｏ ≤5V

monitoring voltage
4 AVCC 12V analog power I 12V
5 #CONTROL Reference voltage I/O Low level: ≤0.8V

generation control signal High level: 5V
6 VCC 5V digital power I 5V
No. Name Description I/O Level

1 LDA The anode of luminotron in O -
semiconductor laser
2 LDC The cathode of luminotron in I -
semiconductor laser
3 PDA The anode of receiver in semiconductor I -
laser
The laser control board does not have an indicator, as it may interfere with the measurement of
the preamplification board. See the following table for the test points.
Table 8-19 Test point of the laser control board
No. Test point Tested signal Function

1 A+12V AVCC +12V power from the analog board
2 A-12V AVSS -12V power from the analog board
5V power from the analog board, turns on
3 D5V VCC
photocouplers on board
4 AGND Analog ground \
2.5V reference voltage generated by U1 on the
5 TPVREF VREF
board
2 times the ground voltage of the sliding end of
varistor (VR1), which control the intensity of the
6 TP2VREF 2VREF
laser. The higher the voltage is, the higher the
laser light intensity, and versa.
8-27
Hardware System
Pressure loss of the current signal returned by

7 TPIPD PDA the photoelectric receiver in the semiconductor
laser on R1, R21 or R1//R21.
Signal of the working current of luminotron in the
semiconductor laser; the voltage of TPILD
8 TPILD LASER
reflects the working current of luminotron, which
checks if the laser is working as expected.
See the following table to troubleshoot errors of the laser control board:
Table 8-20 Troubleshooting errors of the laser control board
No. Error Name Criterion Cause Troubleshooting

The connection with Reconnect or replace
the analog board is the wire.
loose, or the wire is
damaged.
The voltage of
The power supplied to Check if the power
test point
laser control board is supplied by the analog
+12V power A+12V is
1 incorrect board is correct.
error outside the
The power control Check the circuits of
range
circuit is not working the board.
12V±0.6V
properly, like short
circuit to the ground,
so the power is
lowered or lifted.
The voltage of
test point
The cause is the
-12V power A-12V is
2 same as that of the Same as above
error outside the
+12V error.
range
-12V±0.6V
The connection with Reconnect or replace
the analog board is the wire.
The voltage of
loose, or the wire is
test point D5V
5V power damaged.
3 is outside the
error The power supplied to Check if the power
range
laser control board by supplied by the analog
5V±0.25V
the analog board is board is correct.
incorrect
8-28
Hardware System
The voltage of The connection with Reconnect or replace

signal the analog board is the wire.
#CONTROL loose, or the wire is
Control signal under normal damaged.
4
error working Check if the signal
The control signal
condition is no sent by the analog
sent by the analog
higher than board is correct.
board is incorrect
0.8V.
Voltage of Re-weld or replace
TPVREF is If the -12V power is U1.
Reference not 2.5V±0.1V normal, the error may
5
voltage error (-12V is taken be caused by dry joint
as the ground or damage of U1.
reference)
The voltage of If TPVREF is normal, Rowel or replace the
TP2VREF is the error may be components.
Laser
not at the caused by dry joint or
intensity
normal damage of varistor
6 control
working valve VR1, or improper
reference
(the voltage welding of U2 and the
voltage error
shall be R C components
4V~4.1V) around.
Laser tube damage or Reconnect or replace
connection error (the the wire, or replace
The voltage of connection is loose or the laser tube.
Output error TPILD is not the wire is damaged).
of laser within the 5V voltage error See error 3
7 intensity range 1.0~3V See error 4, and
Control signal error or
monitoring (under current check the subsequent
control circuit error
signal TPILD adjustment circuit.
conditions) Dry joint or damage of Re-weld or replace U3
U3 and the and the components
components around around.
8.7 Preamplification Board
8.7.1 Overview
The preamplification board performs photoelectric conversion and signal amplification of the
two scatters (FS-forward scatter, also called low angle scatter; SS-side scatter, also called high
angle scatter) from the flow cell. The low angle and high angle amplification boards share 1
PCB, the amplification times is obtained by welding resistors.
8-29
Hardware System
8.7.2 Function
The functions of the preamplification board are: power adjustment, photoelectric conversion
and signal adjustment.
Power adjusting: this module filters the ±12V power from the analog board, the ripple after the
adjustment is lower than 50mV.
Photoelectric conversion: the photoelectric conversion unit converts optical signal to current
signal using photodiode.
Signal adjusting: converts current signal to voltage signal via I/V, and then sends the signal to
the amplification and adjustment unit to process it into signal that meets the input requirement
of the analog board.
Signal adjustment unit Data board
Power
Photoelectric
FS／SS regulation
conversion unit
(π form filter)
A±12V
FS/SS pre-amplification
board
Figure 8-13 Functional diagram of the FS/SS preamplification board
8.7.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the preamplification board is as follows.
Table 8-21 Modules of the preamplification board

P1 Power source adjustment
P2 Photoelectric conversion
P3 Signal adjustment
8-30
Hardware System
P1
P2
P3
(a) (b)
Figure 8-14 PCBA structure of the preamplification board (a) top (b) bottom
8.7.4 Interfaces
The FS/SS preamplification board has 1 external interface, which is J1 to the motherboard.
The layout of the board is as follows:
Figure 8-15 Interface layout of the FS/SS preamplification board
PIN Definition Description I/O Level

8-31
Hardware System
2 FS/SS Preamplification board < 1V

output voltage signal
3 SHELL Shielding ground - 0
4 AVSS A-12V analog power I -12V±5%

6 AVCC A+12V analog power I 12V±5%
The preamplification board does not have an indicator, as it may interfere with its
measurement. See the following table for the test points.
Table 8-23 Definition of test points on the preamplification board
Test Function
No. Tested signal
point
1 AGND Analog ground \
2 +12V AVCC +12V power from the analog board
3 -12V AVSS -12V power from the analog board
4 OUT OUT Output signal of FS/SS preamplification board
See the following table to troubleshoot errors of the preamplification board:
Table 8-24 Troubleshooting errors of the preamplification board
Error
No. Criterion Cause Troubleshooting
Name
The connection with the
Reconnect or
analog board is loose, or the
replace the wire.
wire is damaged.
Check if the power
The voltage of test
The 12V power sent by the supplied by the
12V point +12V is outside
analog board is incorrect. analog board is
1 power the range 12V±0.6V,
correct.
error or the ripple noise is
Dry joint or damage of the
higher than 50mV.
components related to test
Re-weld or replace
point +12V (such as inductor
the components.
L1, capacitor C24, C27, C20
and C23).
-12V The voltage of test The connection with the
Reconnect or
2 power point -12V is outside analog board is loose, or the
replace the wire.
error the range wire is damaged.
8-32
Hardware System
-12V±0.6V, or the Check if the power

ripple noise is higher The -12V power sent by the supplied by the
than 50mV. analog board is incorrect. analog board is
correct.
Dry joint or damage of the
components related to test
Re-weld or replace
point -12V (such as inductor
the components.
L2, capacitor C22, C26, C25
and C21).
The FS board is installed to the
SS output signal too Replace the
position of the SS board by
weak (assuming it is boards.
mistake.
caused by circuit
Incorrect resistance, dry joint Re-weld or replace
problem)
or damage of R4, R5 or R6. the components.
The SS board is installed to

FS output signal too Replace the
the position of the FS board by
strong (assuming it boards.
mistake.
is caused by circuit
Incorrect resistance, dry joint Re-weld or replace
Output problem)
3 or damage of R4, R5 or R6. the components.
error
No output signal of
Dry joint or damage of Re-weld or replace
the preamplification
photodiode D1 or R1. the components.
board (FF/SS), or
the signal is too Dry joint or damage of U2 or Re-weld or replace
weak. U3. the components.
Check the related resistors
Bandwidth error of and capacitors, such as R4,
Re-weld or replace
the preamplification R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4, to see
the components.
board (FS/SS) if there is any dry joint or
damage.
8.8 Power Board
8.8.1 Overview
The power board of BC-5390 Auto Hematology Analyzer provides six groups of stable power,
including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.
8-33
Hardware System
Ac 90（ 390V
input EMI and D5V
PFC Standby（ flyback)
rectifying
VCC
prote Prot
linear ction ectio
390V
of n of
VDD flyba forw
ck ard
A+12V
A-12V
Flyback
AC130V
P12V
Forward
P24V
Figure 8-16 Functional diagram of the power board
8.8.2 Function
The power board works under the voltage of (50~60Hz) input by AC 90V~264V.
Once the power switch is on, all circuits start to work, the D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V
and P24V all have voltage output.
See the following table for details:
Table 8-25 Characteristics of output voltages
Voltage Minimum Rated Output voltage Voltage Load Sound

current current range adjustment adjustment
rate rate
D5V 2A 5A 4.85/5.25V ±1% ±5% 100mV

+A12V 0mA 1A 11. 5/12. 5V ±1% ±5% 100mV
-A12V 0mA 650mA -11.5/-12.5V ±1% ±5% 100mV
P12V 0.3A 5.5A 11.5/12.5V ±1% ±5% 150mV

P24V 0A 4A 22/27V ±1% ±10% 150mV
AC120V 0mA 60mA 115/145V(RMS) ±1% ±10% /
The highest current generated by the P24V power is 7.8A, whose duration is 2S, cycle is 60S.
8-34
Hardware System
8.8.3 Structure
Figure 8-17 Power board
8.8.4 Interfaces
The power board has 7 external interfaces, 2 of them are sockets (J1 and J2), and the others
are connected to external components with wires (the PCB numbers are TP1～TP20). See the
8-35
Hardware System
following figure for position of the interfaces.
Figure 8-18 Interfaces of power board
The functions of the interfaces are listed in the following table.
Table 8-26 Interfaces of the power board
Welding
Interfaces Function Pin number Description
disk number
J1 AC input 3 / /
J2 Fan power output 6 / /
Analog section Output via wire
A-J12 power output 6 4 welded to PCB
Output via wire
A-J13 AC output part 3 2 welded to PCB
Power section power Output via wire
A-J35 output 10 10 welded to PCB
Digital section power Output via wire
A-J37 output 4 4 welded to PCB
8-36
Hardware System
 Definition of J1
Table 8-27 Input AC socket
Pin Definition
1 L, connect to the live wire of the grid power.
2 PG, connect to ground wire
3 N, connect to the null wire of the grid power.
 Definition of J2:
Table 8-28 Fan socket
Pin Definition
P12V, connect to positive end of P12V output
1/3/5 voltage
PGND, connect to negative end of P12V output
2/4/6 voltage
 Definition of pin A－J12
Table 8-29 Definition of analog board outputs
Welding disk Definition Pin

AGND, connect to the reference
ground of analog board output
TP16AGND\TP17AGND voltage 6,7
+A12V, connect to positive end of 5
TP15A12V +A12V output voltage
-A12V, connect to negative end of 8
TP18A-12V -A12V output voltage
/ NC 1/2/3/4
Table 8-30 Definition of AC output
Weldi
ng disk Definition Pin
TP19\TP20 2 output ends of AC120 1/3
/ NC 2
8-37
Hardware System
Table 8-31 Definition of power section power outputs

Positive end of P12V output
TP1P12V/TP2P12V 4/5
voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P PGND, negative end of P12V
6/7/8/9/10
GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND output voltage
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24 Positive end of P24V output
1/2/3
V voltage
Table 8-32 Definition of D5V outputs

Positive end of 5V output
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
voltage 1/2
DGND, negative end of 5V 3/4
TP7DGND/TP8DGND
output voltage
Table 8-33 Definition of debug and test points
No. Pin Function Reference valve

position
1 Q101.2 Q101 on/off waveform /
2 Q101.1 Q101 drive waveform /
3 C114.+ PFC output voltage 390±20V
4 U101.9 Chip reference voltage output 7.5V
5 U101.14 U101 oscillating waveform /
6 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V
7 C204 VDD voltage 12±1V
8 C223 Power supply voltage of U201 12±1V
11 U201.8 U201 reference voltage 5V
13 Q201.3 R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current /
waveform
14 C232.+ D5V output voltage and ripple voltage 5±0.5V
15 C311.+ U301 power supply voltage 12±1V
8-38
Hardware System

20 Q303.3 Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage /
waveform
21 C326.+ 12VB voltage 12±0.5V
22 C328.+ 130V DC output 115V~150V
23 C332.+ A+12V output 12±0.5V
24 C338.- A-12V output -12±0.5V
25 U351.15 U351 power supply voltage 12±0.5V
27 U351.11 U351 drive waveform /
34 C409.＋ U401 power supply voltage 12±1V
38 Q406.1 U406 drive waveform /
40 C423.＋ P24V output voltage, ripple 22~27V
41 C442.+ P12V output voltage, ripple 12±0.5V
The errors of power board can be troubleshooted as per the following procedure.
8-39
Hardware System
malfunction
Check fuse（ N Is the output of D5V or

standby
VCC is right?
（ flyback)
Check PFC N Is the output of 390V is

boost right?
Is the output of VDD is N

Check VDD linear circuit
right（
A+12V/A-12V/AC130 according
Is the output of A+12V/A- N malfunction of flybcak（
12V/AC130V（ P12V/P24V P12V/P24Vaccording malfunction
is right（ of forward
Other malfunction
Figure 8-19 Troubleshooting power board errors
It must be ensured that the power assembly and the main unit cabinet are firmly connected by
screws.
8.9 Fluid Detection Board
8.9.1 Overview
The fluid detection board detects if there is any reagent or diluent. The board gets power
supply from the drive board and sends its own signal to the drive board.
8-40
Hardware System
Fluidic tubing Fluid Power Drive

detection signal board
board
Figure 8-20 The connections of fluid detection board and other boards
8.9.2 Function
The functional diagram of fluid detection board is as follows:

Constant
current
Transmit Receiving Hysteresis OUT1
ting tube tube comparator
drive circuit
Constant
Power Constant current
supply current drive circuit
drive circuit
switch
Constant
current
drive circuit
Constant
current
drive circuit
Figure 8-21 Functional diagram of fluid detection board
8.9.3 Structure
The fluid detection board PCB:
Top
8-41
Hardware System
Bottom
Figure 8-22 Fluid detection board
8.9.4 Interfaces
Table 8-34 Interfaces of the fluid detection board to the motherboard
Pin Signal name I/O Description Level

1 DGND Ground 0V
2 D5V I Power supply +5V
3 LIQ1 O Fluid detection 0~+5V
4 LIQ2 output signal, high
5 LIQ3 level 5V means
6 LIQ4 there is reagent
7 LIQ5 detected; low level
8 LIQ6 0V means no
reagent.
9 D_CTRL_N I Controls the on/off Turn-off voltage:
signals of above 3.8V
photocoupler Turn-on voltage:
luminotron, high below 2V
level turns off the
luminotron.
10 DGND Indicated the
connection status
of fluid detection
board
8-42
Hardware System
Table 8-35 Indicators of the fluid detection board
Position No. Color Description

D1~D4 Green On means there is no fluid in the photocoupler of the
luminotron.
Off means there is fluid in the photocoupler of the
luminotron.
D7 Red On means the fluid detection board is working,
D1~D4 can detect if there is fluid.
Off means the fluid detection board is in standby
mode, D1~D4 cannot detect if there is fluid.
When error occurs to the fluid detection board, the analyzer will report "insufficient reagent".
Troubleshoot the fluid detection board error as per the following procedure:
Analyzer reports
"insufficient reagent"
NO NO Does the indicator D7 on fluid

Other Is the J1.2 to J1.10
detection board light in red when
malfunctions voltage about 5V?
the analyzer is working?
YES
YES
NO
Other Is the J1.9 to J1.10
Do the D1~D4 (green) on fluid
malfunctions voltage about 5V? Fluid
detection board light on when NO
detection
there is liquid at the position of
board error
corresponding photocouplers,
and off where there is not?
YES
Fluid YES
detection
board error
Do the LIQ position on NO Fluid

J1 is above 4V when detection
D1~D4 light on, and board error
less than 1V when the
indicators are off?
YES
Other
malfunctions
Figure 8-23 Troubleshooting procedure
8-43
Hardware System
8.10 Indicator Board
8.10.1Overview
The indicator board is connected with the digital control board, it receives signals from the
digital control board to indicate analyzer status.
8.10.2Function
The indicator board has 2 basic functions:

Status indicating: the indicating system of the indicator board consists of 3 colors, which are
red, yellow and green, indicating different status of the analyzer.
Sound alarming: the buzzer in the indicator board provides sound alarm function when error
occurs.
8.10.3Structure
Top
Bottom
Figure 8-24 The indicator board
8.10.4Interfaces
The indicator board has 1 interface, J1. The definition of J1 is listed in the following table.
PIN Signal Description

Green indicator control signal, on when the electric
1 GREEN_LED
level is high, off when the level is low.
2 YELLOW_LED Yellow indicator control signal, on when the electric
8-44
Hardware System
level is high, off when the level is low.

Red indicator control signal, on when the electric level
3 RED_LED
is high, off when the level is low.
4 GND Digital circuit ground
Buzzer control signal, the buzzer beeps when electric
5 BUZ_N
level is low, and vice versa.
6 GND Digital circuit ground
7 VCC 5V power, supplies power to the buzzer and indicator.
8 \ Reserved
8.10.5Indicators and test points
Definitions of test points on the indicator board are listed in the following table.
Table 8-37 Lists of indicator board test points
Test
Printed label Function Note
point
TP1 VCC Test point of 5V power Normal voltage range 4.75V-5.25V
TP2 GND Ground test point Normal voltage range 4.75V-5.25V
Test point of green indicator

TP3 / 3.3V TTL level
control signal
Test point of yellow indicator
control signal
Test point of red indicator
control signal
When the indicator is on, the
Test point of green indicator
TP6 / electric level is low; when it is off,
working status
the electric level is high (5V).
Test point of yellow indicator
working status
Test point of red indicator
working status
8.10.6Troubleshooting
There are 2 types of frequent indicator board error:
 The indicator fails to work as intended
8-45
Hardware System
Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the indicator is damaged.
Solution: reconnect or replace the wire, or replace the LED indicator.
 The buzzer fails to work as intended
Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the buzzer is damaged.
Solution: reconnect or replace the wire, or replace the buzzer.
8.11Key Board
8.11.1Overview
The key board controls the [ASPIRATE] and [OPEN] keys to enable human machine interface
during the autoloading/manual loading process.
8.11.2Function
The key board has 2 basic functions:
 Human machine interface by the [ASPIRATE] key: users press the [ASPIRATE] key to
start autoloading analysis.
 Human machine interface by the [OPEN] key: users press the [OPEN] key to open the
sample compartment door.
8.11.3Structure
Figure 8-25 The key board
8-46
Hardware System
8.11.4Interfaces
The key board has only 1 external interface, J1.
PIN Name Description Level

1 / / /
2 COUNT_KEY ASPIRATE key 3.3V TTL
3 INSERT_KEY OPEN key 3.3V TTL
4 GND Ground 0-0.2V
None.
Frequent error: the keys do not respond to pressing.

Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the key is damaged.
Solution: reconnect the wire; if the error still exists, replace the key board.
8.12 Mini Network Board
8.12.1Overview
The mini network board divides the channel in which the data board communicates the PC into
2 parts, it is the transit point of the internal and external network cable of the analyzer.
8.12.2Function
The mini network board provides direct connection to the 2 RJ45 connector in and outside the
analyzer. See the following figure:
Figure 8-26 Functional diagram of the network board
8-47
Hardware System
8.12.3Structure
The PCB of the mini network board (top and bottom) is as follows:
Figure 8-27 Top and bottom of mini network board PCBA
8.12.4Interfaces
The pin definitions of J1 and J2 interfaces are the same, see the following table:
Table 8-39 Description of mini network board interfaces and pins
Pin Signal I/O Description Level

name
1 TX_P I Connected to data board UTP
TX_P
2 TX_N I Connected to data board UTP
TX_N
3 RX_P O Connected to data board UTP
RX_P
4 CT1_P I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT1_P
5 CT1_N I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT1_N
6 RX_N O Connected to data board UTP
RX_N
7 CT2_P I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT2_P
8 CT2_N I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT2_N
8-48
Hardware System
There is no indicator or test point in the board.
Table 8-40 Troubleshooting the mini network board
Error
Cause of error Troubleshooting method
phenomenon
Step 1: Check if the network cable connection is
1. The network loose. If yes, reconnect the cable and see if the
cable is not problem is solved; if no, go to step 2.
properly Step 2: Take out the mini network board, and test the
The PC cannot
connected; conducting state of the pins of J1 and J2. See the
communicate
2. The cable is figure above for pin definition of J1 and J2. If pin 1-8
with 3106
damaged or of J1 is conducted with pin 1-8 of J2, the mini
poor contact of network board is normal, the error may be caused by
the interface some other part of the analyzer; otherwise the mini
network board is damaged and must be replaced.
 The table above can be represented by the flow chart below:
PC cannot communicate
with 3106
YES
Securely plug Is the cable connector to mini
the connector network board loose?
NO
YES
Other Are pin 1-8 of J1 conducted
malfunctions with pin 1-8 of J2?
NO
Mini network
board error
Figure 8-28 Troubleshooting the mini network board
8-49
Hardware System
8.13Optical-coupler Board
8.13.1Introduction
The optical-coupler board amplifies blood detection signals and drives the blood sensor.
8.13.2Function
The optical-coupler board provides driving current to the blood sensor, and amplifies the output
voltage of the blood sensor. The output voltage of the optical-coupler board is transmitted to
the analog board and ADC of the main control board via the sockets and lines.
8.13.3Structure
The PCB of the optical-coupler board:
Figure 8-30 Top and bottom of the optical-coupler board
8.13.4Interfaces
The pin definitions of J1 and J2 interfaces, see the following table:
Table 8-41 Interfaces of Optical-coupler board
Position No. Interface
J1 Optical-coupler interface
J2 Interface to analog board
Definitions of test points on the indicator board are listed in the following table.
8-50
Hardware System
Table 8-42 Lists of Optical-coupler board indicators
Indicator Description
D1 A5V power indicator, on when the A5V power is normal
D2 A12V power indicator, on when the A12V power is normal
D3 A12V_N power indicator, on when the A12V_N power is normal
1. No voltage output from the optical-coupler board.

Possible causes and solutions:
1) The blood sensor is damaged. Solution: replace the blood sensor.
2) The wire connecting the blood sensor to the optical-coupler board is not firmly connected to
the socket J1. Solution: Reconnect the wire to the socket.
3) The power supply wire of the optical-coupler board gets loose. Solution: reconnect the wire.
4) The optical-coupler board is damaged. Solution: replace the optical-coupler board.
8.14List of Prefixes of Board Sockets

Table 8-43 Lists of prefixes of board sockets
Socket
No. Board No. Board Name Unit Labeling
Prefix
1 051-001146-00 Power board PCBA 1 A A-J1…
Pinaster main control

2 051-000985-01 1 B B-J1...
board PCBA
3 051-002223-00 Analog Board PCBA 1 C C-J1…
4 051-000981-02 Drive board PCBA 1 D D-J1…
Autoloading board
5 051-000393-00 1 E E-J1…
PCBA
6 051-001062-00 Indicator board PCBA 1 G G-J1…
7 3102-30-69197 Key Board 1 H H-J1…
Fluid detection board

8 051-000983-01 1 I I-J1…
PCBA
9 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board 1 J J-J1…
FS Preamplification
10 3101-30-68515 1 K K-J1…
Board
SS preamplification
11 3101-30-68517 1 L L-J1…
board
8-51
Hardware System
Mini Network Board

12 051-001122-00 1 M M-J1…
PCBA
Optical-coupler Board
13 051-002176-00 1 N N-J1…
PCBA
8.15Connections of Lines and Board

Table 8-44 Connections of lines and boards
Position
Board Name Line Name Part No. Connecting to
No.
D5V, P12V and P24VP12VD5V
J11 P24V power 009-003914-00 power patch line
extension line (009-002286-00)
Network patching Mini network board
J1 009-002561-00
line (051-001122-00) -J2
Indicator board
Indicator/key board
J78 009-002245-00 (051-001062-00)
connection line
-J1
Sample
compartment door Door detection and
J79 detection and 009-002519-00 optical module
optical module micro-switch
connection line
Door detection and Door detection and
Pinaster main aspirate key 009-002274-00 aspirate key
control board connection line micro-switch
PCBA J81 Digital control
Drive board PCBA
051-000985-01 board and drive
009-002275-00 (051-000981-02)
board connection
-J13
line
Data board and Autoloading board
autoloading board PCBA
J8 009-002271-00
serial port (051-000393-00)
connection line -J11, J12
Main control board Analog board PCBA
J85 high-speed analog 009-002227-00 (051-002223-00)
line -J7
Main control board Analog board PCBA
J86 low-speed analog 009-002228-00 (051-002223-00)
line -J8
Main control Analog board PCBA
J77 009-002229-00
analog board (051-002223-00)
8-52
Hardware System
digital line -J9
RBC/PLT signal
J1 3102-20-69109 RBC bath
line
J2 WBC signal line 3102-20-69113 WBC bath
FS preamplification
board
(3101-30-68515)-J1
Optical system
J3 009-002225-00 and SS
signal line
preamplification
board
(3101-30-68517)-J1
J4 HGB signal line 3102-20-69112 WBC bath
A±12V and A±12V and AC120V

J5 AC120V power 009-002603-00 power output line
Analog board extension line (009-002287-00)
PCBA A±12V and A±12V and AC120V
051-002223-00 J24 AC120V power 009-002603-00 power output line
Laser control board
Optical system
J6 009-002226-00 (3101-30-68513)
control line
-J1
Pinaster main
Main control board
control board PCBA
J7 high-speed analog 009-002227-00
(051-000985-01)
line
-J85
Pinaster main
Main control board
control board PCBA
J8 low-speed analog 009-002228-00
(051-000985-01)
line
-J86
Pinaster main
Main control
control board PCBA
J9 analog board 009-002229-00
(051-000985-01)
digital line
-J77
Drive board valve
J2 13-29 connecting 009-002272-00 Valve 13-28
Drive board
line
PCBA
Connection line of
051-000981-02
J3 drive board valve 009-002284-00 Valve 1-12
1-12
8-53
Hardware System
Pump connection
J4 009-002279-00 Pump 1-4
line
D5V and P12V D5V and P12V
J6 power extension 009-002602-00 power output line
line (009-002514-00)
Fluid detection
Fluid detection
board
J7 board connection 009-002280-00
(051-000983-00)
line
-J1
Temperature
J8 sensor connection 009-002276-00 Temperature sensor
line
3112 float
J9 009-004131-00 Float switch
connection line
Sample collection
Sample collection
assembly
J10 009-002288-00 assembly
photocoupler
photocoupler
connection line
Syringe
Syringe
J11 photocoupler 009-002289-00
photocoupler
connection line
Digital control Pinaster main
board and drive control board PCBA
J13 009-002275-00
board connection (051-000985-01)
line -J81
Heater connection
J14 009-002277-00 Heater
line
D5V, P12V and P24VP12VD5V
J15 P24V power 009-003914-00 power patch line
Sample collection
Sample collection
J16 assembly motor 009-002466-00
assembly motor
connection line
ASP_SP syringe
ASP motor and SP
J17 motor connection 009-002458-00
motor
line
SH syringe
J18 assembly motor 009-002457-00 SH motor
connection line
LYSE_DIL syringe
LYSE and DIL
J19 assembly motor 009-002283-00
syringe motor
connection line
8-54
Hardware System
Sample
electromagnet
J3 009-003928-00 compartment
connection line
electromagnet
P24V, P12V and Power board PCBA
J5 D5V power 009-002286-00 (051-001146-00)
patching line -A-J37 and A-J35
mix mechanism
Mix mechanism
J6 photocoupler 009-002516-00
photocoupler
connection line
autoloading
mechanism Autoloading sensor
J7 3102-20-69103
position sensor group 1
connection line 1
autoloading
mechanism Autoloading sensor
J8 3102-20-69103
position sensor group 2
Autoloading
connection line 2
board PCBA
Data board and Pinaster main
051-000393-00
autoloading board control board PCBA
J11 009-002271-00
serial port (051-000985-01)
connection line -J8
Data board and Pinaster main
autoloading board control board PCBA
J12 009-002271-00
serial port (051-000985-01)
connection line -J8
autoloading Loading motor
J14 mechanism motor 3102-20-69103 lateral and
connection line longitudinal motors
mix mechanism
Mix mechanism X
J15 motor connecting 009-002517-00
and Z motor
line 1
mix mechanism
J16 motor connecting 009-002518-00 Mix motor
line 2
Analog board PCBA
Optical system
Laser control J1 009-002226-00 (051-002223-00)
control line
board -J6
3101-30-68513 Laser connection
J2 3101-21-68593 Laser
line
FS
Analog board PCBA
preamplification Optical system
J1 009-002225-00 (051-002223-00)
board signal line
-J3
3101-30-68515
8-55
Hardware System
SS
Analog board PCBA
preamplification Optical system
J1 009-002225-00 (051-002223-00)
board signal line
-J3
3101-30-68517
Switch and power
J1 board connection 3101-20-68589 Power switch
line
A±12V and AC120V
A±12V and
power extension
A-J12 AC120Vpower 009-002287-00
line
output line
(009-002603-00)
A±12V and AC120V
A±12V and
Power board power extension
A-J13 AC120Vpower 009-002287-00
PCBA line
output line
051-001146-00 (009-002603-00)
D5V P12V and
P24V, P12V and
A-J35 P24V power
D5V power 009-002286-00
extension line
patching line
(009-003914-00)
D5V and P12V
D5V and P12V power extension
A-J37 009-002514-00
power output line line
(009-002602-00)
Fluid detection Fluid detection Drive board PCBA
board J1 board connection 009-002280-00 (051-000981-02)
051-000983-00 line -J7
Network cable
J1 (connecting the 009-000043-00 Analyzer PC
Mini network analyzer to PC)
board Pinaster main
051-001122-00 Network patching control board PCBA
J2 009-002561-00
line (051-000985-01)
-J1
Pinaster main
Indicator board Indicator/key board control board PCBA
J1 009-002245-00
051-001062-00 connection line (051-000985-01)
-J78
Pinaster main
Key board Indicator/key board control board PCBA
J1 009-002245-00
3102-30-69197 connection line (051-000985-01)
-J78
Optical-coupler Blood detector Blood detector
J1 009-005649-00
board PCBA wire optical-coupler
8-56
Hardware System
051-002176-00 Analog board PCBA

Optical system
J2 009-002226-00 (051-002223-00)
control line
–J6
8.16Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches

Table 8-45 Connections of wires and components of the autoloading board
Name Wire label Connecting to
SFXM Lateral feeding motor
SFYM Longitudinal feeding motor
Motor MX Mix assembly extension motor
MZ Mix assembly lift motor
MR Mix assembly mix motor
Mix assembly extension mechanism home position

MX-START
photocoupler
Mix assembly extension mechanism end position
MX-END
photocoupler
MZ-START Mix assembly lift mechanism home position photocoupler
MZ-END Mix assembly lift mechanism end position photocoupler
MR-START Mix assembly mix motor home position photocoupler
FX_START X loading motor home position photocoupler
Photocouplers FX_END X loading motor end position photocoupler

and
FY_START Y loading motor home position photocoupler
Micro-switches
FUL_START Unloading home position photocoupler
FY_LEFT Y left feeding photocoupler
FY_RIGHT Y right feeding photocoupler
FX_READY X loading ready micro-switch
FUL_FULL Unloading tray full detection photocoupler
SAMPLE/RACK Tube rack detection photocoupler
FY_READY Y feeding ready photocoupler
8-57
Hardware System
F-TUBE Tube detection photocoupler
DOOR Door status detection photocoupler
Table 8-46 Connections of wires and components of the power drive board
Connecting to Wire label Connecting to
P1-PRESS Pressure pump
Pump P2-WASTE Waste pump
P3-VACUUM Vacuum pump
Valve V1-V28 Valve 1 - valve 28
AMBIENT Ambient temperature sensor
T1-OPTI Optical system temperature sensor

Temperature
T2-DIFF DIFF bath temperature sensor
sensor
T3-DIL Diluent temperature sensor
T4-RBC_DIL RBC liquid inlet temperature sensor
F1-WASTE Waste float switch

Float switch
F2-DIL Diluent float switch
Sample collection assembly X motor home

SEN1-X_INIT
position photocoupler
Sample Sample collection assembly X motor position
collection SEN2-X_POS
photocoupler
assembly Sample collection assembly Y motor home
photocoupler SEN3-Y_START
position photocoupler
SEN5-VALVE Pressure relief valve detection photocoupler
SEN6-ASP ASP syringe photocoupler
SEN7-SP SP syringe photocoupler

Syringe
SEN8-SH SH syringe photocoupler
photocoupler
SEN9-DIL DIL syringe photocoupler
SEN10-LYSE LYSE syringe photocoupler
HT1-OPTI Optical system heater

Heater assembly
HT2-DIFF DIFF bath heater
8-58
Hardware System
HT3-DIL Diluent heater
TS1-OPTI Optical system temperature switch
TS2-DIFF DIFF bath temperature switch
TS3-DIL Diluent temperature switch
Sample M1-X Sample collection assembly X direction motor

collection
assembly motor M2-Y Sample collection assembly Y direction motor
M3-ASP ASP motor
M4-SP SP motor
Syringe motor M5-SH SH motor
M6-DIL DIL motor
M7-LYSE LYSE motor
Table 8-47 Lists of wires and micro-switches of digital control board
Connecting to Wire label Connecting to
K1-ASPIRATE Aspirate key micro-switch
Micro-switch K2-R_DOOR Right door micro-switch
K3-OPTICS Optical module micro-switch
Card reader READER RFID card reader
8.17Analyzer Status Indicated by the Indicators

The analyzer status can be told from the following two aspects.
Analyzer power indicator: the power indicator is on the left plate, as shown in the following
figure. The power indicator is in static green after the power switch in turned on, which shows
the power supply of the analyzer is normal. If the indicator is off after the power switch is turned
on, that means the power supply of the analyzer is abnormal or the indicator is damaged, the
analyzer shall not be started until the problem is solved.
8-59
Hardware System
Figure 8-29 Power indicator
Analyzer working status indicator: the indicator is in the front cover of the analyzer, it indicated
the analyzer status using 3 different colors.
Table 8-48 Analyzer status indicated by the indicator
Analyzer status Indicator status
Power-off Off
Ready Static green
Running Flickering green
Running with error Flickering red
Error, not running Static red
Fluidic actions not allowed, no

Static yellow
error
Supporting superimposition of
Flickering yellow
sample analyzing sequences
8-60
9 Mechanical System
9.1 Analyzer Structure
The analyzer is composed of the main unit (including the autoloader) and the PC, as well as
the diluent and 3 lyses connected to it.
9.2 Appearance
The front of the analyzer is shown as Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Front of the analyzer
No. Name FRU Code No. Name FRU Code

1 Power/Status / 4 /
[Open door]
indicator
2 [Count] / 5 Tube /
3 6 Autoloading
Tube rack 801-3102-00059-00 115-039747-00
Assembly
The back of the main unit is shown as Figure 9-2.
9-1
Mechanical System
Figure 9-2 Back of the analyzer
No. Name FRU No. Name FRU

Code Code
1 Network interface plate / 2 Diluent inlet /
3 / 4 M-5LEO (II) Lyse /
M-53LH Lyse connector
connector
5 M-5LEO (I) Lyse / 6
Power input connector
connector
7 Waste connector / / / /
9.3 Layout Introduction

Components of the front cover are shown in Figure 9-3.
9-2
Mechanical System
Figure 9-3 Front of the analyzer (front cover open)

1 Front cover / 2 Probe 115-015343-00
3 Tube / 4 Tube rack 801-3102-00059-00
5 Syringes / 6 Fluidic /
valve
7 Regulating / / /
valve 801-3101-00029-00
assembly
The side view of the analyzer with the sample compartment door open is shown in Figure 9-4.
9-3
Mechanical System
Figure 9-4 Side view of the analyzer (sample compartment door open)

1 Tube holder / 2 Adapter /
3 Sample / / /
compartment 115-022843-00
door
The layout of the components on the right plate is shown in Figure 9-5.
9-4
Mechanical System
Figure 9-5 Right side of the analyzer (right door open)

1 Optical System 2 Sampling
115-013054-00 115-021332-00
Assembly
3 4 Diluent
Vacuum cell
801-1805-00006-00 pre-heating 801-3201-00066-00
assembly (FRU)
assembly
5 Fluidic valve 6 Rotatory
/ diaphragm 801-3003-00012-00
(with cable)
7 Measurement 8 DIFF bath
115-040273-00 115-040272-00
bath assembly assembly
9 Auto mixing / / /
3102-30-69261
assembly
The layout of the components on the left plate is shown in Figure 9-6.
9-5
Mechanical System
Figure 9-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door open)

1 Air pump 801-1805-00010-00 2 Syringes /
3 Pressure 4 Liquid
chamber level
801-3101-00016-00 051-000565-00
assembly detection
unit
5 Fluidic valve 6 Power
/ /
switch
7 Circuit board / 8 / /
9-6
Mechanical System
9.4 Autoloading Assembly
9.4.1 Structure Introduction
4
5
3
2 Y X
8 7 6
Figure 9-7 Autoloading assembly

1 Reflective 2 Unloading
115-066687-00 801-3102-00021-00
photocouplers unit
3 Feeding 4 Tube
counter detection
801-3102-00020-00 801-3102-00065-00
photocoupler
assembly
5 Micro-switch 6 Loading
unit
801-3100-00002-00 3102-30-69240
(X-direction
loading)
7 Horizontal 8 sample
feeding unit storehouse
3102-30-69243 115-012506-00
(Y-direction subassembly
feeding)
9-7
Mechanical System
Figure 9-8 Autoloading assembly (top cover not included to show the photocoupler
position)

1 X-direction 2 X-direction
loading home loading end
801-0030-00003-00 801-0030-00003-00
position position
photocouplers photocouplers
3 Tube 4 Tube piercing
detection position
position 801-3102-00065-00 counting 801-0030-00003-00
counting sensor
sensor
5 Y-direction 6 Unloading
feeding home photocouplers
801-0030-00003-00 115-066687-00
position
photocouplers
Figure 9-9 Unloading unit
9-8
Mechanical System

1 Unloading 2 /
801-0030-00003-00 Bracket
photocouplers
3 Wheel and rack / / / /
assembly
Figure 9-10 Loading unit

1 801-3100-00038-00 2 /
at the bottom of the
Step motor Linear track
window structure
3 / 4 Photocouplers
(X-direction
Loading push
loading home 801-0030-00003-00
plate
position
photocouplers)
5 Photocouplers 6 /
(X-direction
loading end 801-0030-00003-00 Bracket
position
photocouplers)
9-9
Mechanical System
Figure 9-11 Loading unit

1 Pawl / 2 Step motors 801-3100-00038-00
3 / 4 Y-direction
Feeding slide feeding home
801-0030-00003-00
plate position
photocouplers
5 Right 6 Left /
photocouplers photocouplers
(tube piercing (tube piercing
801-0030-00003-00
position position
counting counting
photocouplers) photocouplers)
Figure 9-12 Sample compartment assembly
9-10
Mechanical System

1 Bracket 2 Tension spring /
3 / 4 Photocoupler /
Photocouplers
block
5 Torsional spring / 6 Damping gear /
7 Sample / / /
compartment
115-025293-00
electromagnet
assembly
Figure 9-13 Sample compartment electromagnet assembly
No. Name FRU No. Name FRU

Code Code
1 Installation / 2 /
Guide bushing
bracket
3 Positioning pin / 4 Electromagnets /
9.4.2 Relevant Troubleshooting Measures
Trigger of Error
Error Code Error Name Troubleshooting/Solution
Report
1. Check if the software, sequence,
X-direction and autoloader versions are correct.
Software command
0x01005700 loading motor 2. Click "Remove Error".
is delayed
in action 3. Restart the software and the
analyzer.
The X-direction 1. Check if the photocouplers are
loading home OK: see if the they are in different
X-direction
position states when blocked and not
photocouplers are blocked.
action error 1
not blocked when 2. Find the photocoupler with error
they are supposed and remove it. Check if there is dust
9-11
Mechanical System
to be blocked or splashed fluid covering the

glittering side.
3. Wipe the photocoupler and
mount it back to see if the error can
be removed. If not, replace with a
new one. 4. Click "Remove Error".
5. Check if there is interference
between the loading unit and the
cover of the autoloader.
1. Make sure there is no tube rack
in the tube rack position/
2. Click "Remove Error".
X-direction Tube rack or 3. Check if the micro-switch is OK:
loading motor micro-switch is see if it is in different states when
0x01005702
current action blocked in blocked and not blocked.
forbidden Y-direction 4. Check if the cables are properly
connected to the micro-switch. 5. If
the error still exists, replace the
micro-switch with a new one.
1. Confirm the current position of
the loading mechanism.
2. If it is between the home position
The end position and the end position: a. check if
photocouplers are there is any interference along the
blocked when the loading pathway (e.g. interference
loading mechanism with the cover, obstacle on the
is at the home loading tray, tube rack improperly
X-direction
position; or the end placed, etc.); b. if there is no
position interference, check if the motor is
action error 2
photocouplers are OK, and the cables are properly
not blocked when connected to it.
the loading 3. If it is at the home or end position,
mechanism is at check if the photocouplers are OK:
the end position the photocouplers are in different
states when blocked and not
blocked, and the cables are all
properly connected to them.
The home position 1. Before troubleshooting, make
photocouplers and sure all cables of the related parts
X-direction
end position are properly connected, e.g. if the
loading motor
0x01005704 photocouplers of cables are well connected to the
photocoupler
the loading tray are photocouplers, if the cables are well
error
blocked at the connected to the motor and
same time photocouplers, if the photocoupler
9-12
Mechanical System
or motor cables are accordingly

connected to the labeled positions.
2. Check if there is any obstacle
blocking the photocouplers.
3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the
error can be removed.
OK: see if the they are in different
blocked.
5. Find the photocoupler with error
and remove it. Check if there is dust
or splashed fluid covering the
glittering side.
new one.
1. If there is no tube rack on the
loading tray: could be X-direction
loading end position photocoupler
error. Check if the end position
photocouplers are OK.
After the loading, if 2. If there is/are tube rack(s) on the
both the loading loading tray: a. the micro-switch is
end position not pressed by any tube rack: check
X-direction photocouplers and for obstacle or interference on the
0x01005705 loading motor tube detection loading tray; check if all tube racks
loading error micro-switch are are correctly placed (make it unable
not blocked, the to press the micro-switch); b. the
error will be micro-switch is pressed by tube
reported rack: check if the micro-switch
works properly.
3. If all the items above are checked
to be OK, check if the loading motor
works properly and all the cables
1. Before troubleshooting, make
sure all cables of the related parts
Micro-switch error:
Loading are properly connected, e.g. if the
it is detected to be
0x01005708 micro-switch cables are well connected to the
pressed when it is
error photocouplers, if the cables are well
not pressed
connected to the motor and
photocouplers, if the photocoupler
9-13
Mechanical System
or motor cables are accordingly

connected to the labeled positions.
blocking the photocouplers.
blocked.
5. Check if the photocouplers work
improperly, or the micro-switch is
aged that could be not able to go up
and down properly.
1. Check if the software, sequence,
Y-direction and autoloader versions are correct.
Software command
0x01005900 feeding motor 2. Click "Remove Error".
is delayed
in action 3. Restart the software and the
analyzer.
When there is a
tube rack along the
Y-direction
feeding pathway,
motor 1. Remove the tube rack.
0x01005901 the error will be
initialization 2. Click "Remove Error".
reported when the
forbidden
autoloading count
is started
1. If the unloading tray
The unloading tray photocouplers are confirmed to be
photocouplers are blocked, remove the tube racks on
Unloading blocked, which the tray.
0x01005902
action error means that the 2. If there is no tube rack on the
unloading tray is unloading tray, check if the
full photocouplers work properly and all
cables are well connected.
The Y-direction 1. Check if all software and
feeding home hardware versions are correct.
position 2. Before troubleshooting, make
photocouplers are sure all cables of the related parts
Y-direction
blocked when it is are properly connected, e.g. if the
supposed to be not cables are well connected to the
action error
blocked, or not motor and photocouplers, if the
blocked when they cables are well connected to the
are supposed to be motor and photocouplers, if the
blocked. photocoupler or motor cables are
9-14
Mechanical System
accordingly connected to the

labeled positions.
4. Perform feeding mechanism
self-test at the "Self-Test" screen,
and see if the error can be removed.
blocked.
6. For photocoupler error, find the
photocoupler with error and remove
it. Check if there is dust or splashed
fluid covering the glittering side.
new one.
8. If the error still exists, check the
motor to see if it does not reach the
photocoupler position because of
step loss or operation obstruction
(less likely to happen).
1. Check if all software and
hardware versions are correct.
are properly connected, e.g. if the
cables are well connected to the
The unloading
photocouplers, if the cables are well
home position
connected to the motor and
photocouplers are
Unloading photocouplers, if the photocoupler
blocked when they
position or motor cables are accordingly
0x01005904 are supposed to be
photocoupler connected to the labeled positions.
not blocked, or not
error 3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the
blocked when they
are supposed to be
blocked.
and see if the error can be removed;
5. Check if the unloading
mechanism works properly, and if
the gear rack can run out properly. If
the gear rack cannot run out or
9-15
Mechanical System
cannot reach the photocoupler

detection area, check the
mechanism;
blocked;
fluid covering the glittering side;
new one.
The Y-direction 1. Check if all software versions are
feeding right correct;
photocouplers are 2. Before troubleshooting, make
Y-direction
blocked when they sure all cables of the related parts
right
0x01005905 are supposed to be are properly connected, e.g. check
photocoupler
not blocked, or not if the cables connecting motor and
error
blocked when they photocoupler are properly
are supposed to be connected, if the photocoupler or
blocked. motor cables are accordingly
connected to labeled positions;
error can be removed;
and see if the error can be removed;
The Y-direction
feeding left
photocouplers are
Y-direction left blocked when they
blocked;
0x01005906 photocoupler are supposed to be
error not blocked, or not
blocked when they
are supposed to be
blocked.
7 Wipe the photocoupler and mount
it back to see if the error can be
removed. If not, replace with a new
one;
9-16
Mechanical System

1. Check if all software versions are
correct;
are properly connected, e.g. check
if the cables connecting motor and
photocoupler are properly
connected, if the photocoupler or
motor cables are accordingly
connected to labeled positions;
Y-direction feeding 4. Perform feeding mechanism
home position self-test at the "Self-Test" screen,
photocouplers not and see if the error can be removed;
Y-direction
blocked, which 5. Check if the photocouplers are
means the motor is OK: see if the they are in different
feeding error
not at the home states when blocked and not
position, and the blocked;
feeding is forbidden 6. For photocoupler error, find the
7 Wipe the photocoupler and mount
it back to see if the error can be
one;
Error reported in 1. Check the state of the Y-direction
the following cases: home position photocouplers and
1. Y-direction that of the unloading home position
Y-direction
feeding home photocouplers, and make sure they
feeding motor
0x01005909 position are OK and the cables are properly
unloading
photocouplers are connected;
error
not blocked 2. Check if there is any interference
2. Unloading home in the feeding process, which make
position the tube rack not fully pass the left
9-17
Mechanical System
photocouplers are photocoupler

not blocked
3. Left
photocoupler
counter not 0
1. Make sure the 3106 tube racks
are used;
Y-direction left Unexpected hop of 2. Make sure there is no obstacle
and right the left and right along the feeding pathway;
0x0100590D photocouplers photocouplers 3. Make sure the left and right
cooperation while pushing the photocouplers, as well as all cables
error tube rack connected to them are OK;
4. Make sure the photocoupler
barriers are well mounted
1. Check if there is a tube rack with
tube(s) at the tube detection
position;
2. If no, check if the tube detection
photocouplers are OK; place a tube
at the tube detection position, and
Tube
check if the photocouplers are in
detection Tube detection
different states when blocked and
photocouplers photocouplers are
0x0100590F not blocked;
are blocked blocked after
3. Check if there is an obstacle
after initialization
along the pathway of L
initialization.
photocoupler detection;
4. Wipe the photocouplers and
check if they work properly;
5. If the error still exists, replace the
tube detection photocouplers with a
new pair
Right photocoupler along the tube rack feeding pathway
does not change which prevents the tube rack from
after trying the moving;
Right
feeding action for 5 2. Check if all software and
photocoupler
times, which is hardware versions are correct;
damaged; or
0x01005910 probably because 3. Check if all cables connected to
unable to
the right the right photocouplers are properly
drag the tube
photocoupler is connected, and if there is any
rack
damaged or the damage;
tube rack cannot be 4. Check if the right photocouplers
dragged are OK: press the spring leaf, and
check if the photocouplers are in
9-18
Mechanical System
normal state;
5. Check if the photocoupler barrier
is properly mounted, and if the
photocoupler is blocked when
pressing the barrier;
6. Replace the cables, and check if
the photocoupler works properly;
7. Replace the photocouplers
Opening 1. Check if the software,
Unable to open the
sample autoloading board MCU and FPGA
0x01005a01 sample
compartment versions are correct; check if the
compartment door
door failed autoloading board 24V, 12V, 5V
powers are normal;
2. Check if the sample compartment
door is open; if it is open, check if
the compartment door detection
photocouplers and the cables
connected to them are OK;
3. If the door is not open, check if
the electromagnet cable is well
connected;
4. Pull the tail of the electromagnet
to open and close the compartment
door, and see if there is interference
Closing sample or obstruction.
/ / compartment door 5. If there is obstruction, remove the
failed electromagnet assembly, and then
remove the guide bushing. Check if
the clamp on the positioning pin
falls off. If it did fall off, replace the
clamp. Remount the guide bushing
and make sure there is no
obstruction between the bushing
and the protruded axle of the
magnet core (rotate the core in
different directions, and there
should be no obstruction); if there is
still obstruction, replace the
electromagnet.
This error only occurs in the position
Adjustment adjustment performed by
Adjusted valve out
0x01005a04 parameter out manufacture or service engineers
of range
of range Re-adjust when this error is
reported (according to
9-19
Mechanical System
F-3109-CTO-01 Instrument
Adjustment Procedure)
1 Check if the software, autoloading
board MCU and FPGA versions are
correct; check if the autoloading
board 24V, 12V, 5V powers are
Read scanner
normal;
Read scanner error. No message
0x01005a05 2. Check if the cables to the
error is sent back in
scanner are well connected;
500ms
3. Restart the analyzer, and see if
the error still exists;
4. If the error still exists, replace the
scanner
9.5 Mixing Assembly
Figure 9-14 Structure of the mixing assembly
1 --- Z-direction motor 2 --- Z-direction end position photocouplers
9-20
Mechanical System
3 --- Z-direction home position photocouplers 4 --- X-direction end position photocouplers
5 --- X-direction home position photocoupler 6 --- X-direction motor
7 --- Mixing motor 8 --- Mixing home position photocoupler
Error Trigger of Error

Error Code Troubleshooting/Solution
Name Report
0x01005500 Mixing 1. Check if both the Z-direction motor
motor Z-direction motor not and X-direction motor are at the end
current at the end position or position;
action not X-direction motor not 2. Check if the Z-direction motor,
allowed at the end position, X-direction motor, and all cables
so the action is not connected to them are OK;
allowed 3. Click "Remove Error"
0x01005501 Mixing 1. Check if the software, sequence and
motor in autoloading versions are correct;
action 2. Click "Remove Error;"
Software command 3. Restart the software and the
is delayed analyzer
0x01005502 Mixing The home position 1. Check if all software versions are
motor photocouplers are correct;
action error blocked when the 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure
motor is not all cables of the related parts are
supposed to be at properly connected, e.g. check if the
the home position; cables connecting motor and
SMRM home photocoupler are properly connected, if
position the photocoupler or motor cables are
photocoupler or accordingly connected to labeled
motor error positions;
0x01005503 Mixing The home position 3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the
motor photocouplers are error can be removed;
action error not blocked when 4. Perform mixing mechanism self-test
the motor is at the "Self-Test" screen, and see if the
supposed to be at error can be removed;
the home position; 5. Check if the photocouplers are OK:
SMRM home see if the they are in different states
position when blocked and not blocked;
photocoupler or 6. For photocoupler error, find the
motor error photocoupler with error and remove it.
0x01005504 Mixing X-direction motor not Check if there is dust or splashed fluid
motor at the end position or covering the glittering side;
action not Z-direction motor not 7 Wipe the photocoupler and mount it
allowed at the end position, back to see if the error can be
9-21
Mechanical System
so the action is not removed. If not, replace with a new

allowed one;
0x01005507 Motor not End position 8. If the error still exists, check the
supposed photocouplers are motor to see if it does not reach the
to be at the blocked when the photocoupler position because of step
end motor is not loss or operation obstruction (less likely
position supposed to be at to happen).
the end position;
SMRM end position
photocoupler or
motor error
0x01005508 Motor The end position
supposed photocouplers are
to be at the not blocked when
end the motor is
position supposed to be at
the end position;
SMRM end position
photocoupler or
motor error
0x01005606 Mixing Current 1. Check if all software versions are
mechanism pinching/mixing correct;
current action is forbidden 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure
action (because at least all cables of the related parts are
forbidden one of the 3 motors properly connected, e.g. check if the
of the mixing cables connecting motor and
assembly is not at photocoupler are properly connected, if
the home position) the photocoupler or motor cables are
accordingly connected to labeled
positions;
4. Perform mixing mechanism self-test
at the "Self-Test" screen, and see if the
5. Check if the photocouplers are OK:
see if the they are in different states
when blocked and not blocked;
photocoupler with error and remove it.
Check if there is dust or splashed fluid
covering the glittering side;
7 Wipe the photocoupler and mount it
back to see if the error can be
9-22
Mechanical System

one;
photocoupler position because of step
loss or operation obstruction (less likely
to happen).
9.6 Sampling Assembly
The sampling assembly is designed to aspirate, dispense, and mix the samples. The sample
probe moves in two directions:
1. X－Direction: go to the sampling, DIFF, WBC, RBC positions, and complete sample
mixing;
2. Y-Direction: complete sample fetching, sample probe cleaning, etc.
Figure 9-15 The structure of the sampling assembly
9-23
Mechanical System
X-direction mechanism consists of the horizontal bracket, X-direction guide bar, guide bar fixer,
synchronous belt and pulley, X-direction home position photocoupler, and motor. There are
notches on the horizontal bracket, each of which matches a position detection photocoupler to
detect the position.
Figure 9-16 The structure of the X-direction mechanism of the sampling assembly
There are 8 positions on the X direction for the sample probe, which are (from back to front):
RBC bath position, WBC bath position, CRP2# bath position, CRP1# bath position, DIFF bath
position, autoloading sampling position, CRP latex reagent position, and closed sampling
position.
9-24
Mechanical System
Figure 9-17 The structure of the Y-direction assembly
The sample probe is driven by the piercing slide. The rotation of the motor is transferred into
the linear motion by the lead screw nut set, which is the Y-direction motion guided by the
guiding axle. The Y-direction home position photocoupler is installed on the piercing bracket,
and the barrier of the piercing slide is used as the barrier of the photocoupler, in order to locate
the Y-direction positions of the sample probe.
9.6.2 Maintaining the Assembly
For piercing force deficiency in Y-direction (error 0228 is usually reported), follow the
instructions below:
 Check if any set screw fixing the Y-direction motor shaft on the lead screw is loose;
 Check if any screw in the piercing bracket is loose;
 Check if the assembly is well lubricated, and add some lubricant to the parts which have
sliding friction in Y direction (e.g. the ring contact surface of the Y-direction guide bar and
the piercing slide, lead screw nut set, etc.);
 Check if the Y-direction photocoupler or motor is damaged. Replace with a new one if
damaged.
For X-direction motion not in place (error 0201 is usually reported), follow the instructions
below:
 Check if the press bar of the fixing belt is loose;
 Check if the X-direction detection photocoupler comes into contact with the horizontal
bracket in the whole motion process, which damages the photocouplers or influence the
9-25
Mechanical System
proper operation of the photocouplers;
 Check if the X-direction photocoupler barrier comes into contact with the X-direction home
position photocoupler;
 Check if the assembly is well lubricated, and add some lubricant to the parts which have
sliding friction in X direction (e.g. the ring contact surface of the X-direction guide bar and
the piercing bracket, the contact surface of the horizontal bracket and the rotation stop
block, etc.);
 Check if the X-direction motor is damaged. Replace with a new one if damaged.
 The following sections introduce the replacing procedures of motors and photocouplers:
9.6.2.1 Replacing the X-Direction Home Position Photocouplers
Figure 9-18 Replacing the X-direction home position photocouplers of the sampling
assembly
Remove the 2 M3x8 screws fixing the X-direction home position photocoupler bracket using a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the X-direction home position photocouplers
together with the bracket from the analyzer. Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the
photocouplers using a cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the photocouplers. Install
the new photocouplers in the reversed order of the steps above.
You can also replace the photocouplers after removing the sampling assembly.
After the replacement, pull the Y-direction movement module, and check if the X-direction
home position photocoupler barrier are between the 2 photocouplers.
9-26
Mechanical System
9.6.2.2 Replacing X-Direction Detection Photocouplers
Figure 9-19 Replacing the X-direction detection photocouplers of the sampling

assembly
Remove the 2 M3x5 screws fixing the X-direction detection photocoupler bracket using an
inner hexagon spanner, and then remove the X-direction detection photocouplers together with
the bracket from the analyzer. Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the photocouplers using a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the photocouplers. Install the new photocouplers
in the reversed order of the steps above.
After the replacement, pull the X-direction movement module, and check if the fold of the
horizontal bracket (used as the barrier) is between the 2 photocouplers. Make adjustment if
necessary.
9.6.2.3 Replacing Y-Direction Photocouplers

Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the Y-direction photocouplers using a cross-headed
screwdriver (as shown in the figure above), and then remove the photocouplers. Install the
new photocouplers in the reversed order of the steps above.
9-27
Mechanical System
9.6.2.4 Replacing X-Direction Motor
Figure 9-20 Replacing the X-direction motor of the sampling assembly-1
Open the covers of both right and left sides.

Remove the M3x8 screw fixing the sample probe and the fixing plate, and then dismantle the
probe wipe circlip. Remove the probe wipe, sample probe, and the fixing plate from the
sampling assembly. Note that when removing the M3x8 screw, press the M3 nut at the back of
the piercing slide to prevent from falling off; make sure that the tubing is not damaged when
you remove the probe wipe and sample probe.
Unplug the 3 cables which come from the towline and connect to the Y-direction motor,
Y-direction motor, and X-direction detection photocouplers of the sampling assembly. Remove
the 3 M3x8 screws and 1 M3x5 inner hexagon screw of the frontal protective plate using the
cross-headed screwdriver and inner hexagon spanner, and then remove the frontal protective
plate from the sampling assembly.
Unplug the connector of the cable connecting the X-direction home position photocouplers of
the sampling assembly, and remove the 4 M4x8 screws fixing the sampling assembly using a
cross-headed screwdriver; hold the whole sampling assembly and take it away from the
analyzer, and then unplug the cable connecting the sampling assembly to the X-direction
motor to remove it.
9-28
Mechanical System
Remove the 4 M3x8 screws (with washers) fixing the X-direction motor with a cross-headed
screwdriver, and then remove the motor with the driving band wheel fixed on it.
Remove or loosen the 2 M3x5 set screws fixing the driving band wheel with an inner hexagon
spanner, and then remove the driving band wheel from the X-direction motor shaft.
Install the X-direction motor in the reversed order of the steps above after the replacement.
Pay attention to the notes below while installing:
1. The distance from the driving band wheel to the end of the X-direction motor shaft is
2.5mm;
2. One of the set screws of the driving band wheel should be pressed to the flat of the
X-direction motor shaft;
3. While installing the X-direction motor on the sampling assembly, the cable coming out of
the motor should stand upwards (pointing to the top of the instrument);
4. While installing the X-direction motor on the sampling assembly, adjust the lengthwise
position, making the synchronous belt properly stretched; after the installation of the
sampling assembly, lean it to the left and then right, to see if the Y-direction movement
module can slide down properly;
5. While installing the sampling assembly on the analyzer, make sure all cables and tubes
are well protected.
9.6.2.5 Replacing Y-Direction Motor
To replace the Y-direction motor, it is needed to remove the whole sampling assembly from the
analyzer (as instructed in the section above).
9-29
Mechanical System
As shown in the figure above, remove the 2 M3x10 inner hexagon screws fixing the press bar
of the synchronous belt using an inner hexagon spanner, remove the M4x8 screw fixing the
horizontal guide bar and guide bar retaining bracket using a cross-headed screwdriver,
remove the 2 M4x20 inner hexagon screws fixing the driven wheel assembly using an inner
hexagon spanner, and then demount the Y-direction movement mechanism from the sampling
assembly.
As shown in the figure above, remove or loosen the 2 M3x5 set screws fixing the Y-direction
guide bar using an inner hexagon spanner, remove the 4 M3x10 inner hexagon screws (with
spring and flat washers) fixing the Y-direction motor using an inner hexagon spanner, and then
remove the Y-direction motor.
Install the Y-direction motor in the reversed order of the steps above after the replacement.
Pay attention to the notes below while installing:
1. One of the set screws of the Y-direction guide bar should be pressed to the flat of the
Y-direction motor shaft;
9-30
Mechanical System
2. While installing the Y-direction motor on the Y-direction movement mechanism, the cable
coming out of the motor should point at the photocoupler;
3. For proper installation of the Y-direction motor: secure the 4 M3x10 screws (with spring
and flat washers) fixing the motor first, and then the 2 M3x5 set screws.
9.7 Replace the Syringe Assembly
9.7.1 Structure of the 100ul syringe assembly
2
8
Figure 9-24 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly

1 2 M3X6 /
Syringe fixing cross-recessed
801-3110-00087-00
plate panhead screw
with washer
3 100ul 4
Tailor-made
Mindray 115-012523-00 3001-20-07031
screw
syringe
5 / 6 M3X6 /
Bottom plate cross-recessed
panhead screw
7 Protective / 8
Photocoupler 801-3003-00015-00
cover
9 Motor 801-2002-00001-00 10 / /
9-31
Mechanical System
9.7.2 Structure of 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly
10
2
3 9
8
4
7
5
Figure 9-25 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly

1 2 Syringe fixing
Motor 0000-10-10985 3101-20-68309
plate
3 250ul Mindray 4 Tailor-made
115-012708-00 041-005167-00
syringe screw
5 / 6 M3X6 /
Leader cross-recessed
panhead screw
7 Lead screw / 8 Photocoupler 801-3003-00015-00
9-32
Mechanical System
9.7.3 Structure of 2.5ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
1
11
10
3
4 9
5
8
Figure 9-26 2.5ml lead screw driving syringe assembly

1 / 2 M3X6 /
Syringe fixing cross-recessed
plate panhead screw
with washer
3 2.5ml Mindray 4 2.5ml Mindray
syringe (silicon 801-3101-00048-00 syringe 0033-30-74613
rubber) (fluororubber)
5 041-005167-00 6 /
Tailor-made at the bottom of the
Leader
screw window structure
7 M3X6 / 8 /
cross-recessed Lead screw
panhead screw
9 Protective 10
801-2002-00001-00 Photocoupler 801-3003-00015-00
cover
11 024-000366-00 12 / /
Motor
window structure
9-33
Mechanical System
9.7.4 Structure of 10ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
9
1
8
2
7
3
Figure 9-27 10ml lead screw driving syringe assembly

1 10ml die 2 M3X25 /
sinking syringe 115-015338-00 cross-recessed
panhead screw
3 Tailor-made 4 Leader /
041-005167-00
screw
5 M3X6 041-005167-00 6 Lead screw /
cross-recessed at the bottom of the
panhead screw window structure
7 Protective / 8 Photocoupler
801-3003-00015-00
cover
9 Motor 024-000366-00 10 / /
window structure
9-34
Mechanical System
Troubleshooting/Solut
Error Code Error Name Trigger of Error Report
ion
1. Photocouplers are Photocoupler error
still blocked when the or excessive motor
syringe is out of the assembly resistance
detection area after which leads to step loss
initialization; or operation
Sampling 2. Photocouplers are not obstruction.
syringe blocked when the syringe is Low possibility of
0x01000301
photocoupler inside photocoupler occurrence.
error detection area after 1. Check if the software
initialization; version and hardware
3. Syringe should not be at version are correct, and
the home position after if the 24V, 12V and 5V
resetting, but the power are proper;
photocouplers are blocked. 2. Check if the cables of
Sampling the photocouplers and
Photocouplers are not
syringe motors are well
blocked when the syringe is
0x01000302 aspiration/dispe connected and make
supposed to be at the home
nsation action sure there is no bad
position
failure 1 connection;
Sampling Home position 3. Click "Remove Error"
syringe photocouplers are blocked to see if it can be
0x01000303 aspiration/dispe when the syringe is removed;
nsation action supposed to be out of the 4. Perform self-test at
failure 2 home position the "Self-test" screen;
When the syringe starts 5. When the motor is
Sample syringe
moving, it is supposed to operating, check if the
aspiration/dispe
0x01000304 arrive at the home position, LED indicator of the
nsation action
but the photocouplers are corresponding channel
not allowed 1
not blocked; (ASP-M3_LED2;SP-M4
When the syringe starts _LED2, SH-M5_LED2,
Sample syringe
moving, it is supposed to be DIL-M6_LED2,
aspiration/dispe
0x01000305 out of the home position, LYSE-M7_LED2) is
nsation action
but the photocoupler is flickering. If not, replace
not allowed 2
blocked; the driver board;
Sample 1. Photocouplers are 6. Check if the
injection still blocked when the photocoupler states are
0x01000311 syringe syringe is out of the different when it is
photocoupler detection area after blocked and unblocked;
error initialization; 7. Find the
9-35
Mechanical System
2. Photocouplers are not photocoupler with error

blocked when the syringe is and remove it. Check if
inside photocoupler there is dust or
detection area after splashed fluid covering
initialization; the glittering side;
3. Syringe should not be at 8. Wipe the
the home position after photocoupler and
resetting, but the mount it back to see if
photocouplers are blocked. the error can be
Sample removed. If not, replace
injection Photocouplers not with a new one;
syringe blocked when the syringe is 9. Check if the syringe
0x01000312
aspiration/dispe supposed to be at the home assembly is well
nsation action position installed; remove the
failure 1 shielding cover, wipe
Sample the lead screw and the
Home position
injection guide bar, and add
photocouplers are blocked
syringe lubricant;
0x01000313 when the syringe is
aspiration/dispe 10. If the error still
supposed to be out of the
nsation action exists, replace the
home position
failure 2 corresponding syringe
Sample assembly with a new
injection Photocouplers not one.
syringe blocked when the syringe is
0x01000314
aspiration/dispe supposed to be at the home
nsation action position
not allowed 1
Sample
Home position
injection
syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
home position
not allowed 2
Sheath fluid
initialization;
syringe
0x01000321 2. Photocouplers are not
photocoupler
error
inside photocoupler
initialization;
3. Syringe should not be at
9-36
Mechanical System
the home position after

resetting, but the
Sheath fluid
syringe
0x01000322 aspiration/dispe
nsation action
position
failure 1
Sheath fluid Home position
syringe photocouplers are blocked
0x01000323 aspiration/dispe when the syringe is
nsation action supposed to be out of the
failure 2 home position
Sheath fluid
syringe
0x01000324 aspiration/dispe
nsation action
position
not allowed 1
Sheath fluid Home position
syringe photocouplers are blocked
0x01000325 aspiration/dispe when the syringe is
nsation action supposed to be out of the
not allowed 2 home position
initialization;
2. Photocouplers are not
Lyse syringe
inside photocoupler
error
initialization;
resetting, but the
Lyse syringe Photocouplers are not
aspiration/dispe blocked when the syringe is
0x01000332
nsation action supposed to be at the home
failure 1 position
9-37
Mechanical System
Home position
Lyse syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 2
home position
Lyse syringe Photocouplers are not
0x01000334
not allowed 1 position
Home position
Lyse syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
not allowed 2
home position
initialization;
2. Photocouplers are not
Diluent syringe
inside photocoupler
error
initialization;
resetting, but the
Diluent syringe Photocouplers are not
0x01000342
failure 1 position
Home position
Diluent syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 2
home position
Diluent syringe Photocouplers are not
0x01000344
not allowed 1 position
Diluent syringe Home position
0x01000345 aspiration/dispe photocouplers are blocked
nsation action when the syringe is
9-38
Mechanical System
not allowed 2 supposed to be out of the

home position
Replace a new
Mindray syringe. The
replacement should be
performed as follows:
10ml syringe remove the tailored
/ /
leakage screw, and then the 4
MX25 screws fixing the
syringe. Unplug the
tubes, and replace the
syringe with a new one.
Replace a new
Mindray syringe. The
replacement should be
performed as follows:
100ul/250ul/2.5
remove the tailored
/ ml syringe /
screw, and then the 4
leakage
MX25 syringing fixing
plate. Unplug the tubes
and remove the syringe
for replacement.
9.8 Debug Screen Introduction

For closed models, if any part of the sampling assembly or the autoloader is replaced, it is
necessary to check and adjust the mechanical positions (Sample Probe Up Position, DIFF
Bath Up Position closed piercing position and Pincher pinching position.
The adjustment can be completed at the "Debug" screen.
Click "Menu→Service→Debug" to enter the "Debug" screen.
9-39
Mechanical System
Figure 9-28 "Debug" screen
Note 1: after clicking "Start", the assembly should be at the default position, not the adjusted
position; after clicking "Start", the button changes into "Save". The adjustment only takes effect
if you click "Save" after the adjustment. The "Check" button is used to simulate the actions in
normal sample analysis process. Remember to remove the fixtures as instructed.
Note 2: Click the "Coarse Adjust" (bottom left) button to switch to "Fine Adjust", and click again
to switch back. When the button shows "Coarse Adjust", it means the current state of motor
adjustment is "Fine Adjust", when the motor moves 2 steps by one click; when the button
shows "Fine Adjust", it means the current state of motor adjustment is "Coarse Adjust", when
the motor moves 20 steps by one click.
Note 3: in the horizontal movement of the sampling assembly, the stride of one step is 0.16mm;
in vertical movement, 0.04mm.
9.9 Adjusting the Position of the Sample Probe

The adjustment of sample probe positions includes the adjustment of:
 Sample probe up position (probe wipe position)
 DIFF bath up position
 Autoloading piercing position
 Closed piercing position
Note: the "Sample Probe Up Position" variation is included in the formula of autoloading and
closed piercing position step calculation. Therefore, sample probe up position adjustment
is of the first priority; if you adjust the autoloading/closed piercing position first, further
adjustment is needed after the sample probe up position adjustment, since the change of the
sample probe up position will lead to the change of the autoloading and closed piercing
positions.
9-40
Mechanical System
Tools needed for the adjustment include:

 Cross-headed screwdriver
 Ruler
 Fitting pin or sample probe up position fixture
9.9.1 Sample Probe Up Position Adjustment
Adjustment: select "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position", and then click
"Start". Use the "Up" and "Down" buttons to adjust the sample probe tip to be level with the
bottom surface of the probe wipe.
Check: click "Save", and then "Check". Use the sample probe wipe up position fixture to check
the adjusted position as instructed by the figures below:
Figure 9-29 Sample probe up psotion adjustment
If the requirements are not met, adjust again using the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
If there is no fixture, use a ruler and the fitting pin. It is required that the sample probe is inside
the probe wipe, and the probe tip is 7.2±0.2mm up from the bottom of the probe wipe.
9.9.2 DIFF Bath Up Position Adjustment
Select "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position", and then click "Check" to make
the sample probe inside the DIFF bath. Check if the distance from the center of the sample
probe to the inner surface of the DIFF bath (the side close to the frontal plate) is about 2.5mm.
1. If not, click "Start" in the "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position" area, and
then use the "Forward" and "Backward" buttons to adjust the sampling position.
2. When the adjustment finishes, click "Save", and then "Check", to confirm the DIFF bath
sampling position.
3. Exit the "Debug screen" and run a blank count cycle. Make sure that the sample probe
do not touch the bath during DIFF bath mixing, WBC bath Mixing, and RBC bath mixing.
9-41
Mechanical System
9.9.3 Autoloading Piercing Position Adjustment
 Autoloader lengthwise and broadwise adjustment (mechanical method)
 Sample probe lengthwise adjustment (software method)
 Sample probe vertical adjustment (software method)
Where the first 2 steps influence the centering for piercing (deviated piercing), and Step 3
influences the minimum aspiration volume.
Detailed procedures are as follows:
1. Take a tube rack, and place a 12X75 evacuated blood collection tube in the rack. Feed
the tube rack until the collection tube is at the autoloading piercing position, and the 2
tube rack pinch roller seize the rack.
2. At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "AL Piercing
Position" area, and the sample probe start piercing the collection tube cap.
Check if the pierced position is at the center of the tube cap (you can cover the tube cap
with adhesive tape for easier check) without obvious deviation. If it does not meet the
requirement, click "Return", and the sample probe will withdraw from the tube. Adjust as
instructed below:
① For deviation to left or right, remove the 3 screws fixing the autoloader, and make the
autoloader appressed to the front plate. Move the autoloader to left/right, and secure
the screws after the adjustment.
Left screw Middle screw Right screw
Figure 9-30 Autoloading piercing position adjustment
② For deviation to front or back, check if the autoloader is appressed to the front plate
(mechanical method), and adjust the position of the sample probe using the "Forward"
and "Backward" buttons at the "Debug" screen.
③ After the adjustment, click "Check" to check if the piercing position is at the center.
3. Remove the tube cap of the tube and put it back into the tube rack. At the "Debug"
screen of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "AL Piercing Position" area,
and the sample probe start aspirating from the collection tube. Put the collection tube
9-42
Mechanical System
upward manually, and make the probe tip touch the bottom of the tube. Check if the tube
is 3-5mm higher (you can mark on the exterior wall of the tube).
9.9.4 Adjustment of Piercing Position
 Sample compartment broadwise and lengthwise adjustment (mechanical method)
 Sample probe lengthwise adjustment (software method)
 Sample probe vertical adjustment (software method)
Where the first steps influence the centering for piercing (deviated piercing), and Step 2
influences the minimum aspiration volume.
1. Place a 12X75 evacuated blood collection tube into the assorted 13X75 adapter.
2. At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "Piercing
Position" area, and the sample probe start piercing the cap of the collection tube in the
adapter.
Check if the pierced position is at the center of the tube cap (you can cover the tube cap
with adhesive tape for easier check) without obvious deviation. If it does not meet the
requirement, click "Return", and the sample probe will withdraw from the tube. Adjust as
instructed below:
① For deviation to left or right, remove the 3 screws fixing the left and right sides of
sample compartment electromagnet assembly. Check if the distance between the
center of the compartment and the front plate is 117.5mm, move the compartment to
left/right, and secure the screws after the adjustment.
Left side Right side 2

1 screw screws
Figure 9-31 Left and right srew of positions
② For deviation to front or back, check if the distance between the center of the
compartment and the front plate is 117.5mm, and adjust the position of the sample
probe using the "Forward" and "Backward" buttons at the "Debug" screen (debug by
software).
③ After the adjustment, click "Check" to check if the piercing position is at the center.
9-43
Mechanical System
3. Remove the tube cap of the tube and put it back into the adapter. At the "Debug" screen
of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "Piercing Position" area, and the
sample probe start aspirating from the collection tube. Put the collection tube upward
manually, and make the probe tip touch the bottom of the tube. Check if the tube is
3-5mm higher (you can mark on the exterior wall of the tube).
9.10Adjusting the Clamp Position

1. After remove and installation of the mixing assembly, ensure that the mixing assembly is
installed in position.
 Mixing assembly installation and adjustment (mechanical)
 Manipulator position adjustment (software: left/right, front/back)
2. After removing and installing the tube clamp, ensure that the mixing assembly is
installed in position.
 Clamp position adjustment (mechanical)
 Clamp position adjustment (software: left/right, front/back)

1. Get one tube rack, and transport it manually until the 2 tube rack pinch roller seize the
rack.
2. At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, select "Mix Mechanism", and then click
"Initialization→X Forward". The manipulator moves out to the be above the tube rack.
Check visually that the clamp is aligned with the center of the tube position.
3. If the left/right position is incorrect, loosen the 4 M4X8 cross-recessed panhead screws,
and then move the mixing assembly to left/right until the manipulator is aligned with the
center of the tube position, and then secure the screws.
4 M4X8 cross-
recessed panhead
screws
Pin
Check visually that the

pincher is aligned with
the center of the tube
9-44
Mechanical System
Note 1: prevent from deformation while moving the mixing assembly, and adjust the pin in the
assembly if necessary.
Note 2: after the screws are secured, the position of the mixing assembly may change, and
you need to check the clamp position again.
4. If the front/back position is incorrect
a) For the new tube clamp (115-064325-00), configuring the new rotation axis (longer, no
threaded hole in the front) and the old one (shorter, a threaded hole in the front, and two
sides of it are made flat) will use the same adjustment method. Click the “Up” button in
the “Manipulator” section, loosen the two M3X10 stainless-steel inner hexagon screws
used to fix the tube clamp, then move the clamp forward/backward until the manipulator
is aligned with the center of the tube position, and then secure the screws.
Loosen the 2 inner

The old rotation
hexagon screws.
axis, a threaded
The new rotation
hole in the front,
axis, no threaded
and two sides of it
hole in the front.
are made flat.
b) For the old tube clamp (115-006303-00) and old rotation axis, use a retaining screw on
the top of the old tube clamp and a M3X10 stainless-steel inner hexagon screw in the
front of the rotation axis to fix them together. And the manipulator location can’t be
adjusted forward or backward.
9-45
Mechanical System
An inner
hexagon screw
and a retaining
screw
c) Note: the old tube clamp can’t be installed on the new rotation axis. Because the new
rotation axis is fixed with only one retaining screw, then the old tube clamp can’t be
locked tightly.
5. Select "X Backward", and place a 12X75 tube into the tube position the clamp aims at.
Check the relative state of the tube after it is placed back using the X direction, Z
direction, and mix buttons. It is required there should be no interference in the tube
pinching and mixing processes, and all actions should be completed smoothly.
No interference, and
all actions are
completed smoothly. If
the manipulator
position is not correct,
adjust using the
buttons in the
"Manipulator Position"
area.
If the requirement is not met, adjust the manipulator position using the buttons in the
"Manipulator Position" area. After the adjustment, go back to the "Autoloader" screen and
check.
Ensure that:
 The height of the underside of the tube fixing plate over the tube clamp is slightly lower
than the vertical back plate for the tube.
 The underside of the tube clamp is at least 1.5 mm higher than the topside of the tube
rack.
9-46
Mechanical System
Tube fixing plate over the Vertical back plate

tube clamp for the tube
≥1.5mm
9.11Adjusting Built-in Barcode Scanner

1. Get one tube rack, and transport it manually until the 2 tube rack pinch roller seizes the
rack.
2. In the "Built-in Barcode Scanner" area of the "Debug" screen, click "Open", and the
barcode scanner beams.
3. Place a piece of paper right before the tube rack, and observe the reflection of the beam
on the paper. The beam should be aligned with the center of the tube position notch.
If the requirement is not met, loosen the 2 M3X8 panhead screws, and manually adjust the
position of the beam. After the adjustment is successful, re-secure the screws. After the
screws are secured, re-check the position of the beam.
9-47
Mechanical System
9.12Floating Blood Catch Unit Adjustment

1. Enter the "Debug" screen:
2. Manually move the black blood catch ring to find its limit positions. See below for specific
requirements:
Move the catch ring to

its two across corners
sequentially, and
verify the piercing
positions.
a) Move the blood catch ring to the up left corner (limit position) of the seat, and click
"Verify" on the "Debug" screen to verify the autoloading piercing position. If the pierce
probe sticks at the inclined face of the blood catch ring, then it works properly.
b) Move the blood catch ring to the up right corner (limit position), and click "Verify" on the
"Debug" screen to verify the autoloading piercing position. If the pierce probe sticks at
the inclined face of the blood catch ring, then it works properly.
3. If the pierce probe sticks at the outer ring of the blood catch ring, do below steps to
re-adjust the tube rack limit support.
a) Remove the cover of the autoloader.
b) Loosen (but not remove) the 2 screws fixing the tube rack limit support.
2 M4x8
screws
c) Take down the catch ring seat as well as the blood catch ring by removing the 2 screws
fixing the catch ring seat.
9-48
Mechanical System
2 M3 Mindray
screws
d) Click "Verify" on the "Debug" screen to verify the autoloading piercing position. The
pierce probe moves to the piercing position. Make sure there is not any substance under
the pierce probe.
e) Stick or paste 2 pieces of A4 paper to the outside face of the tube rack as below:
f) Load the tube rack into the sampling position. The screw encircled as below should align
with the center of the tube position (to prevent the sample probe sticking at the tube rack
outer rim).
9-49
Mechanical System
g) Adjust the tube rack limit support to a position being in closely contact with the tube rack.
Move the limit support right and left; when seeing from the front of the analyzer (sight
line in vertical with the front of the analyzer), the pierce probe should be at the central
position of the U-shape slot on the rack limit support. Fasten the 2 screws on the lower
end of the rack limit support (make sure the pierce probe is always at the central position
of the U-shape slot).
9-50
Mechanical System
h) Click "Return" on the "Debug" screen to verify the autoloading piercing position. The
pierce probe returns to the home position.
i) Fasten the 2 screws fixing the tube rack limit support.
j) Install the catch ring seat to the tube rack limit support, and fasten the screws to fix it.
There should be a 1.5mm-wide space between the black blood catch ring and white
probe wipe.
There is a
1.5mm-wide space
between the black
blood catch ring
and white probe
wipe.
k) Perform step 2 again to verify the piercing position
9-51
Mechanical System
9.13HGB Assembly Replacement

Table 9-1 Difference between old and new circuit boards
Circuit board figure/PN Compatible HGB assembly Dial method Applicable

version
Old Old HGB assembly Applicable
circuit (applicable to version before to version
board EJ295F) before
115-040273-00 calculating EJ295F
instrument assembly
PN：051-002223-00
New New HGB assembly with Applicable
circuit “new 新” label (applicable to to EJ295F
board EJ295F and later version) and later
version
New label
location
PN：051-002223-01
115-040273-01 calculating
instrument assembly (New
Dial switch + label LED)
Old HGB assembly
(applicable to version before
EJ295F)
115-040273-00 calculating
instrument assembly
9.13.1Maintenance Protocol
9.13.1.1Error Phenomenon
After replacing the HGB assembly, the HGB blank voltage can’t reach the required range.
9-52
Mechanical System
9.13.1.2Solution
Maintenance scenario 1: new circuit board + new HGB assembly
1. Replace a new HGB circuit board.
2. Adjust the dial switch on the circuit board according to the following method.
3. Verify whether the adjustment has achieved satisfactory results referring to “Verification
after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to Maintenance Scenario 1&2)”.
Maintenance scenario 2: new circuit board + old HGB assembly

1. Replace a new HGB circuit board.
2. Adjust the dial switch on the circuit board according to the following method.
3. Verify whether the adjustment has achieved satisfactory results referring to “Verification
after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to Maintenance Scenario 1&2)”.
Maintenance scenario 3: old circuit board + old HGB assembly

The HGB circuit can’t be adjusted by adjusting dial switch when the old HGB circuit
board is used. Adjust it on the “Gain Setup” screen if necessary.
If you cannot adjust the HGB circuit to the normal level on the “Gain Setup” screen, replace a
new circuit board, then adjust the circuit according to the “Maintenance scenario 2”.
9.13.1.3Verification after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to

Maintenance Scenario 1&2)
Login to the analyzer software using the service account, go to “Gain Setup” screen, check
whether the HGB blank voltage reaches the required range. If not, adjust the HGB gain
according to the following flowchart.
9-53
Mechanical System
Adjust the HGB gain using

service account
YES Whether the HGB blank

voltage reaches the
required range
NO
Adjust the HGB blank voltage

according to the dial method in
the above table
Finish
9-54
10 Description and Replacement
Instruction for Wearing Items
10.1When to Replace and the Tools Needed
Process When to replace code Tools needed
Replacing the reagent Replace as needed / /
container
Replacing the waste Replace as needed / /
container
Pierce probe When analyzer has Re-set the height
run analysis for after replacement
30,000 times 3102-20-69171
Replace the fuse When the circuit board Screwdriver
is fused /
Probe wipe filter When analyzer has /
run analysis for
30,000 times 115-011660-00
Air filter When analyzer has /
run analysis for
30,000 times 3001-10-07054
Silica gel When analyzer has /
run analysis for
30,000 times M6G-020034---
Closed tube probe When analyzer has Re-set the height
wipe run analysis for after replacement
60,000 times 041-001013-00
10.2Replacing the reagent container

This function may also be used to refill reagent inside the fluidic system when a new container
of reagent is loaded.
 Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them and the contacted areas in
the laboratory.
10-1
Description and Replacement Instruction for Wearing Items

 The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them and the contacted areas in the
laboratory.
 If reagents accidentally spill on your skin or in your eyes, rinse the area with
ample amount of clean water; seek medical attention immediately.
NOTE
 Let reagents equilibrate at room temperature for a while before using. The
reagents must be kept still for at least a day after long-term transportation.
 When you have changed the diluent, lyse, cleanser or rinse, run a
background to see if the results meet the requirement.
You should replace reagents when:
 the reagent ran out and a new container of reagent is installed.
 the reagent in the tubing is contaminated.
 there are bubbles in the tubing.
Click "Routine maintenance" on the analyzer control board, and select "Reagent" to enter
below screen.
Figure 10-1 Regent selection screen

You can replace the following reagents in the fluidics:
 Diluent
 LEO (I) lyse
 LEO(II) lyse
 LH lyse
10-2
NOTE
 Please keep the diluent container from severe shock or crashing against
other object. Otherwise, the alarming would be unreliable.
10.2.1Replacement of Diluent Container
1. Remove the cap of a new diluent container, and place the container next to the one to
be replaced.
2. Install the supporting board under the cap of the diluent container as instructed below.
3. Insert the cap assembly (shown in the figure below) into the diluent container vertically,
and then secure the cap. Otherwise the alarming may be unreliable.
Figure 10-2 The cap of assembly of the diluent
10.2.2Replacing the Lyse Container
1. Remove the cap of a new lyse container, and place the container next to the one to be
replaced.
2. Turn the cap of the old container counterclockwise, and then take out the cap assembly
with caution.
3. Insert the pickup tube of the cap assembly into the new container, and then turn the cap
clockwise until it is secured.
4. Insert the pickup tube of the cap assembly into the new container, and then turn the cap
10-3
clockwise until it is secured.
10.2.3Replacing the Waste Container

 To avoid waste overflowing from the container, remove the waste container
cap assembly and replace the waste container only when the power
indicator is not flickering.
1. Remove the cap of a new waste container, and place the container next to the one to be
replaced.
2. Remove the supporting board under the old container’s cap.
Figure 10-3 Supporting board
3. Turn the cap counterclockwise and remove the cap assembly from the old container with
caution.
4. Insert the old cap assembly into the new container as vertically as possible, and secure
the cap by turning it clockwise.
5. Install the supporting board under the new container’s cap as shown below.
Figure 10-4 Install the supporting board
6. Cap the old container with the cap of the new one, and then dispose of the waste
properly.
10.2.4Do the following to replace reagent
1. Select the reagent to be replaced.
10-4
2. Enter the barcode of the new reagent. The reagent expiration date will be displayed
automatically.
3. When using an external barcode scanner, scan the barcode of the reagent. When scan
completes successfully, the reagent expiration dates will be displayed in the
corresponding fields.
4. Tap "Replace" to save the exp. date and start to replace the reagent. A progress bar will
be displayed in the process.
5. After reagent replacing is completed, the information area will display “Replacing
reagents completes!”.
6. Replace other reagents as per the above procedures if needed.
10.3Replacing Sample Probe
When the number of sample analysis cycles (only the piercing actions under WB mode will be
counted) has reached or exceeded 30000 (default), the following message will prompt:
“Sample probe needs replacing!”
1. Remove the old sample probe: use a cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the blood
detector wire and the stainless steel M3X8 Cross-recessed panhead screw, remove the
sample probe fixing plate, unplug the EVA tube as well as the protective grommet, and
then pull out the sample probe from the probe wipe.
EVA tube as
and
protective Blood detector
grommet wire
M3X8
Cross-recessed
panhead screw
Sample
probe fixing
plate
Figure 10-5 Remove the sample probe
2. Install a new sample probe: insert the head of the new sample probe into the probe wipe,
and clip the other end into the slot of the sample aspiration assembly, making sure the
sample probe is aligned with the sample aspiration assembly (see the figure below).
10-5
Connect the EVA tube and the protective grommet,and install .
Align the sample

probe with the
Insert the sample
sample aspiration
probe into the
assembly
probe wipe
Figure 10-6 Replace the sample probe
Figure 10-7 Connect the EVA tube and the protective grommet
10.4Replacing Fuse
If the fuse is damaged, please contact our Mindray customer service department or your local
agent to replace it.
10-6
 Be sure to use the fuse of specified model and specifications to avoid fire
hazard.
Do as follows to replace the fuse:

Pry the fuse box out from the power filter (0030-10-1305) with a slot-headed screwdriver, and
replace the 2 protective tubes 5HT10-R (010-000003-00) (see figure 10-13). Then install the
fuse box back into the power filter.
Figure 10-8 Replace the fuse
10.5Examining the Probe Wipe Filter

1. Turn off the analyzer;
2. Open the right door;
Figure 10-9 Probe wipe filter
3. Check the debris in the probe wipe filter. If the debris has accumulated for over 10mm, or
it has covered the whole filter screen, clean or replace the probe wipe filter;
10-7
Figure 10-10 Replaced critical region
4. Clean the sample probe wipe, step 1: pull out the tubing, and remove the filter with a
cross-headed screwdriver
5. Clean the sample probe wipe, step 2: counter flush the filter with a syringe; or
disassemble the filter with a cross-headed screwdriver, and clean the debris on the filter
membrane.
6. Clean the sample probe wipe, step 3: re-install the filter; the filter screen must be in the
notch of the upper cover of the filter
Figure 10-11 Constructional detail
7. Re-install the sample wipe filter, and plug the tubing.

Re-start the analyzer, and make sure the sample probe wipe works properly, and there is no
leak from the sample wipe probe
10.6Examining Air Filter

1. Open the left door of the analyzer;
2. Check the air filter connected to the positive pressure pump, and make sure there is no
water accumulated, and no damage or bent of the air filter.
Figure 10-12 Examining air filter
10-8
10.7Replacing the Rubber Pinch Valve Tubing

1. Open the right door of the analyzer;
2. Remove the shielding cover of the pinch valve.
3. Replace the rubber pinch valve tubing under PV28 pinch valve.
Figure 10-13 Replacing the rubber pinch valve tubing
4. Install the shielding cover of the pinch valve back.
10.8Clean Closed Probe Wipe and Catch Ring

1. Open the compartment door;
2. Open the front cover, and insert the cross-headed screwdriver from the front compartment
door into the screw hole on the sample compartment mount rack.
3. Loosen (do not remove) the screw (in the central position); and when the catch ring limit
support slides down, remove the catch ring.
4. Clean the sample probe wipe and the catch ring in the same way of cleaning open-vial
sample probe wipe and back plate.
5. Re-install the sample probe wipe and the catch ring after cleaning.
6. Lift the catch ring limit support to hide the catch ring.
7. Fasten the screw.
10-9
Figure 10-14 Clean closed probe wipe and catch ring
10.9Replacing the Filter

1. Pay attention to the installing direction; the outlet of the filter has a gap.
2. Insert the tube to the very bottom
Filter
45-90um
Filter 43um
Figure 10-15 Filters
10-10
Appendix
A WX-BOM
No. Order code Material name
1. 0020-20-12523 Cable,power(US)
2. 0033-30-74613 2.5ml syringe
3. 009-000043-00 Network wire( device to computer,gray)
4. 009-000135-00 USB extend line
5. 009-001397-00 usb cable of ASYMBOL scanner
6. 009-002227-00 High-Speed Analog Wire frome Analog board
7. 009-002228-00 Low-Speed Analog Wire frome Analog board
8. 009-002229-00 Digital Wire to Analog Board
9. 009-002245-00 Wire for indicator and keyboard
10. 009-002271-00 USART from main board to Autosample
11. 009-002272-00 wire for valve 13-29
12. 009-002275-00 wire from main board to driver board
13. 009-002276-00 wire for temperature sensor
14. 009-002277-00 wire for heater
15. 009-002278-00 wire for bobber
16. 009-002279-00 wire for pump
17. 009-002280-00 wire for liquid sensor
18. 009-002281-00 cable for motor
19. 009-002284-00 wire for valve（1-12）
20. 009-002288-00 line for sensors on sample module
21. 009-002289-00 line for photo-sensors of syringe module
22. 009-002463-00 extention line for sample module(close)
23. 009-002515-00 cable for motors and sensors of ASR
24. 009-002519-00 wire of AF for CT-OM and DT-RD
25. 009-002561-00 extended line for network
26. 009-002601-00 extention line for D5V ,P12V and P24V
27. 009-002602-00 extention line for D5V and P12V
28. 009-002603-00 extention line for A±12V and AC120V
29. 009-002604-00 earth wire for syringe
30. 009-005584-00 wire of hydraulic pressure detection
31. 009-005649-00 blood detector wire
32. 009-005650-00 blood detector board wire
33. 009-005655-00 Optical System Signal Wire
34. 009-005656-00 Optical System control Wire
35. 011-000203-00 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor 940nm
36. 023-000254-00 1D Bar Code Scanners
37. 024-000366-00 Stepping motor
38. 031-000089-00 Synchronous belt B380MXL-025 rubber
A-1
WX-BOM
39. 031-000096-00 Tank chain

40. 041-000848-00 Tube adapter 1
41. 041-004486-00 0.5ml tube holder
42. 041-006657-00 loading storehouse of 13X75(3106)
43. 115-011439-00 0.5ml tube holdor
44. 115-031548-00 Injector tube adjustor
45. 041-006857-00 ring for proof blood spurt
46. 0010-10-12408 Inline Filter 43um 1/8” I.D. Tubing
47. 043-000829-00 Reagent detection tube
48. 043-000880-00 8.5mm three way connector
49. 043-002330-00 Shell(EN)
50. 045-000521-00 Reagent detector sponge
51. 047-006651-00 Reagent detect board shield
52. 047-006652-00 Force pump shield
53. 049-000399-00 Pilot lamp cover
54. 051-000981-02 Driver board PCBA
55. 051-000983-01 LiquidBoard PCBA
56. 115-068554-00 Main Control Board for BC-5390FDA/CE
57. 115-071707-00 TAKASAGO Valve Assembly (With Cover)
58. 051-001062-00 Indicator board PCBA
59. 051-001122-00 Little Network Board PCBA
60. 051-001146-00 Power Source PCBA
61. 051-002176-00 Optical-coupler board PCBA
62. 051-002223-00 Analog board
63. 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board
64. 3101-30-68515 FS Preamplification Board
65. 3101-30-68517 SS preamplification board
66. 051-000393-01 Autoloading board PCBA
67. 3102-30-69197 Key Board
68. 082-000422-00 TUBE.FEP 714-016100，0.040＂ID×0.066＂OD
69. 082-000432-00 tube.2mmX3.5mm PVDF(inner) TPU(outer)
70. 082-000710-00 tube.Silicone,0.031"×0.197" TYGON 3350
71. 082-001105-00 connector.Elbow,400Barb 3/32"ID PVDF
72. 082-001141-00 connector.Female Luer 2mm"ID PVDF
73. 082-001148-00 connector.Coded lockRing black
74. 082-001149-00 connector.Coded lockRing white
75. 082-001151-00 connector.Coded lockRing red
76. 082-001152-00 connector.Coded lockRing green
77. 082-001155-00 connector.LockNut white
78. 082-001156-00 connector.LockNut black
79. 082-001157-00 connector.LockNut red
80. 082-001158-00 connector.LockNut green
81. 115-008185-00 Reagent temperature detecting asm
A-2
WX-BOM
82. 115-011019-00 Back asm

83. 115-011660-00 Filter
84. 115-011897-00 syringe module
85. 115-011910-00 syringe module(three)
86. 115-012506-00 sample storehouse subassembly
87. 115-012523-00 100ul syringe
88. 115-012708-00 250ul syringe(with nozzle)
89. 115-013090-00 power subassembly
90. 115-013092-00 Diluent Cap assm
91. 115-035628-00 10ml drive system
92. 115-015058-00 LEO(I) Lyse Cap Assembly
93. 115-015059-00 LEO(II) Lyse Cap Assembly
94. 115-015060-00 LH Lyse Cap Assembly
95. 115-015338-00 10ml syringe
96. 115-039887-00 Autoloader assembly
97. 115-015341-00 SMC-LVM valve of two-way
98. 115-015342-00 SMC-LVM valve of three-way
99. 115-015347-00 Autoloader cover assembly
100. 115-015617-00 Back assembly
101. 115-015618-00 Top assembly
102. 115-015773-00 Float shield asm
103. 115-015967-00 SMC 3-way valve
104. 115-040273-00 Calculating instrument assembly
105. 115-024749-00 RBC assembly
106. 115-025293-00 Electromagnet module for sample
107. 115-027254-00 Waste Cap assm(3112)
108. 115-031773-00 Sample assembly
109. 115-031804-00 Piercing needle
110. 115-031977-00 TAKASAGO Valve (Waterproof) Assembly
111. 115-033314-00 Optics system
112. 115-033322-00 liquid detect assembly(3109)
113. 3001-20-07167 Vacuum Chamber Fixed Plate
114. 3003-20-53953 insulation plate for shielding box
115. 3005-20-44746 probe wipe clamp
116. 3101-20-68309 Fix plate of injector
117. 3101-20-68325 Clamp
118. 3101-20-68578 Power switch connecton wire
119. 3101-20-68592 Cable of waste pump
120. 3102-20-69103 Cable of Autoloader
121. 3102-20-69214 Indication pcba button
122. 115-039746-00 Tube rack load unit
123. 115-039745-00 Tube rack feed unit
124. 509B-10-05973 BNC socket
A-3
WX-BOM
125. 801-0030-00003-00 Optical Sensor FRU

126. 801-0105-00034-00 3-way Valve Tubing(1.6*3.2)
127. 801-1805-00006-00 Vacuum chamber assembly
128. 801-1805-00010-00 Rotation Pump(Pressure Pump)
129. 801-1805-00026-00 Air Filter
130. 801-3003-00012-00 Rotation (Waste) pump
131. 801-3003-00015-00 Rotation Motor Position Sensor Assembly
132. 801-3100-00002-00 Switch（Optics/Autoloader Assembly）
133. 801-3100-00038-00 Motor for Autoloader Assembly
134. 115-066687-00 new and old Reflect sensor
135. 801-3101-00012-00 Diff Bath Assembly
136. 801-3101-00016-00 Pressure Chamber
137. 801-3101-00019-00 FS Pre-amplify Board
138. 801-3101-00020-00 SS Pre-Amplify Board
139. 801-3101-00023-00 Waste Pump Assembly
140. 801-3101-00024-00 Laser Control Board
141. 801-3101-00029-00 Release Valve Assembly
142. 801-3101-00048-00 2.5ml injector(silicon latex)
143. 801-3102-00001-00 Linear Stepping Motor 2.1V 1.8 degree bipolar
144. 801-3102-00002-00 Linear Stepping Motor 2.33V 1.8 degree bipolar
145. 801-3102-00004-00 Single-syringe drive assembly
146. 801-3102-00006-00 Shielding cover of bath
147. 801-3102-00012-00 WBC assembly
148. 801-3102-00017-00 Probe wipe
149. 801-3102-00020-00 Sampling feeding counter
150. 801-3102-00021-00 Unloading unit
151. 801-3102-00024-00 Auto mixing assembly
152. 801-3102-00028-00 Isoaltion chamber assembly
153. 801-3102-00047-00 key-press board
154. 801-3102-00050-00 HGB module
155. 801-3102-00059-00 Tube rack module
156. 801-3102-00060-00 Auto-sampling board
157. 801-3102-00061-00 Spring nip
158. 115-041808-00 Code scanner kit
159. 801-3102-00065-00 Test tube detection module
160. 801-3110-00047-00 Tube. FEP,0.040"X0.066"
161. 801-3110-00049-00 Tube.TPU,2mmX3.5mm
162. 801-3110-00051-00 Tube.Tygon, ID1/16"XOD1/8"
163. 801-3110-00052-00 TUBE. Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft
164. 801-3110-00057-00 Tube.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",
165. 801-3110-00058-00 Tubing. Chemfluor FEP,0.062"ODX0.031"ID
166. 801-3110-00060-00 Tubing.PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID
167. 801-3110-00061-00 Tube.TPU,1/8"IDX1/4"OD
A-4
WX-BOM
168. 801-3110-00062-00 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm

169. 801-3110-00063-00 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HL
170. 801-3110-00064-00 Transit tube
171. 801-3110-00084-00 Synchro strap
172. 801-3110-00087-00 Syringe fixed board
173. 801-3110-00132-00 Tygon Tube 1/8"×1/16"(10ft)
174. 801-3110-00133-00 Tubing. PTFE,1/32"X1/16",3000074(1feet)
175. 801-3110-00136-00 Connection.StraightReduction,1/8"&3/32"ID
176. 801-3110-00137-00 3/32 PE TEE FITTING-WHITE NYL T420-1
177. 801-3110-00139-00 Connection.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
178. 801-3110-00140-00 1/8 Y BARBED FITTING-WHITE NYL Y230-1
179. 801-3110-00141-00 3-Way Connector
180. 801-3110-00164-00 Hematology analyzer Hydromaintenance Kit
181. 801-3110-00169-00 Tube.1/16"X3/16",F-5500-A,Fluran
182. 801-3201-00002-00 Two-way mini electromagnetic valve
183. 801-3201-00003-00 Three-way mini electromagnetic valve
184. 801-3201-00004-00 Two-way mini electromagnetic valve(pressurization)
185. 801-3201-00066-00 Diluent Pre-heating Assembly
186. 801-BA30-00149-00 Synchronous belt,B73MXL6.4(FRU)
187. 801-BA40-00254-00 Main Power Switch
188. M6C-020002--- Transmission belt(TBN110MXL025)
189. M6G-020007--- Tube OD3mm ID1mm EVA
190. M90-100009--- Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID
191. M90-100066--- Elbow Reduction,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
192. 115-066647-00 reflective photosensor+extention wire
A-5
B Material Order Code (Fluidics Components)
No. Order code No. Order code

T1 082-000432-00 J25 082-000710-00
T2 082-000432-00 J26 082-000710-00
T3 082-000432-00 J27 M90-100071---
T4 M6G-020055--- J28 M90-100071---
T5 082-000432-00 J29 M90-100071---
T6 082-000432-00 J30 M90-100071---
T7 082-000432-00 J31 A21-000002---
T8 082-000055-00 J32 A21-000002---
T9 082-000432-00 J33 A21-000002---
T10 082-000055-00 J34 A21-000002---
T11 M90-100031--- J35 A21-000002---
T12 M90-100031--- J36 A21-000002---
T13 M90-100031--- J39 M6G-020009---
T14 0040-10-32301 J40 M6G-020009---
T15 0040-10-32301 J42 082-000055-00
T16 M6G-020006--- J43 082-000055-00
T17 082-000710-00 J44 082-000710-00
T18 M90-100031--- J45 082-000710-00
T19 082-000108-00 J46 082-000710-00
T20 M90-000026--- J47 082-000710-00
T21 M90-100071--- P1 M6G-020006---
T22 0040-10-32301 P2 M90-100071---
T23 M90-100071--- P3 M90-100071---
T24 0040-10-32301 P4 M90-100071---
T25 M6G-020006--- P5 M90-100071---
T26 0040-10-32301 P6 A21-000002---
T27 M6G-020011--- P7 A21-000002---
T28 M6G-020055--- P8 M90-100071---
T29 082-000108-00 C1 082-001105-00
T30 082-000108-00 C2 082-001105-00
T31 M6G-020055--- C3 043-000892-00
T32 082-000108-00 C4 043-000892-00
T33 082-000108-00 C5 M90-100027---
T34 082-000108-00 C8 M90-100027---
T35 082-000108-00 C9 M90-100027---
T36 082-000108-00 C10 M90-100027---
T37 082-000108-00 C11 M90-100027---
T38 082-000108-00 C12 M90-100027---
T39 M90-100031--- C13 M90-100027---
T40 0040-10-32301 C14 082-001105-00
T41 082-000108-00 C15 082-001105-00
T42 0040-10-32301 C16 082-001105-00
T43 M6G-020034--- C17 082-001105-00
B-1
Material Order Code (Fluidics Components)
/ / C18 M90-100066---
T45 082-000108-00 C19 082-001105-00
T46 M6G-020055--- C20 M90-100100---
T47 082-000432-00 C21 M90-100100---
T48 082-000432-00 C22 M90-100100---
T49 082-000055-00 C23 M90-100100---
T50 082-000432-00 C24 082-001105-00
T53 082-000108-00 C25 M90-100028---
T54 082-000108-00 C26 M90-100028---
T55 082-000108-00 C27 M90-100028---
T56 082-000108-00 C28 M90-100028-03
T57 082-000108-00 C29 M90-100028-03
T58 082-000108-00 C30 M90-100028---
T59 082-000108-00 C31 M90-100028---
T60 M6G-020055--- C32 M90-100028---
T61 082-000108-00 C33 M90-100028---
T62 3001-10-07069 C34 M90-100028---
T63 M6G-020055--- C35 M90-100028---
T64 M6G-020055--- C36 M90-100065---
T65 082-000108-00 C37 M90-100065---
T66 3001-10-07069 C38 M90-100065---
T67 M90-100071--- C39 M90-100028-03
T68 M90-100071--- C40 M90-100028-03
T69 3001-10-07069 C41 M90-100028-03
T70 M90-100071--- C42 M90-100030---
T71 M90-000025--- C43 M90-100030---
T72 M90-000025--- C44 043-000880-00
T73 0040-10-32301 C45 M90-100009---
T74 M90-100071--- C46 043-000751-00
T75 0040-10-32301 C47 043-000751-00
T76 M90-100071--- C48 043-000751-00
T77 M90-100071--- C49 M90-100025---
T78 M90-100071--- C50 043-000750-00
T79 M90-100071--- C51 043-000750-00
T80 M90-100071--- C52 043-000750-00
T81 M90-100071--- C53 043-000750-00
T82 M90-000025--- C54 043-000750-00
T83 M90-100071--- C55 043-000750-00
T84 M90-000025--- C56 043-000751-00
T85 M90-100071--- C57 043-000751-00
T86 3001-10-07069 C58 043-000751-00
T87 3001-10-07069 C59 M90-100025---
T89 M90-100031--- C60 M90-100009---
T90 M90-100071--- C61 M90-100009---
T91 M90-100071--- C62 M90-100025---
T92 M90-100071--- C63 3102-20-69219
B-2
T93 M90-100071--- C64 082-001105-00

T94 3001-10-07069 C65 082-001105-00
T95 3001-10-07069 C66 M90-100066---
T96 3001-10-07069 C67 M90-100066---
T97 3001-10-07069 C68 043-000892-00
T98 3001-10-07069 C69 082-001105-00
T99 M90-100071--- C70 043-000892-00
T101 M90-100031--- C71 043-000892-00
T102 M90-100071--- C72 082-001105-00
T103 M90-100071--- C73 043-000892-00
T104 M90-100071--- C74 082-001105-00
T105 M90-100071--- C76 082-001105-00
T106 3001-10-07069 C77 M90-100028---
T107 3001-10-07069 C78 082-001105-00
T108 3001-10-07069 C79 M90-100066---
T109 3001-10-07069 C80 M90-100066---
T110 3001-10-07069 C81 M90-100027---
T111 3001-10-07069 C82 082-001105-00
T112 M90-100071--- C83 082-001105-00
T113 M90-100071--- C84 082-001105-00
T114 3001-10-07069 C85 043-000892-00
T115 3001-10-07069 C86 043-000892-00
T116 M90-100071--- C87 043-000892-00
T117 3001-10-07069 SV01 115-013056-00
T118 M90-100071--- SV02 115-033286-00
T119 M90-100071--- SV03 115-033286-00
T120 M90-000025--- SV04 115-033286-00
T121 M90-000025--- SV05 115-013056-00
T122 3001-10-07069 SV06 115-033286-00
T123 M90-100071--- SV07 115-033286-00
T124 3001-10-07069 SV08 115-033292-00
T125 M90-100071--- SV09 115-033289-00
T126 M90-100071--- SV10 115-033289-00
T127 3001-10-07069 SV11 115-033289-00
T128 M90-000025--- SV12 115-033289-00
T129 M90-000025--- SV13 115-011404-00
T130 M90-000025--- SV14 115-013056-00
T131 082-000055-00 SV15 115-033292-00
T132 M6G-020006--- SV16 115-033292-00
T133 M6G-020006--- SV17 115-033292-00
T134 M90-100071--- SV18 115-033289-00
T135 M90-100071--- SV19 115-033289-00
T136 M90-000025--- SV20 115-033289-00
T137 082-000432-00 SV21 115-033289-00
T138 082-000432-00 SV22 115-033289-00
T139 082-000432-00 SV23 115-033289-00
B-3
T140 M6G-020055--- SV24 115-033289-00

T141 M6G-020034--- SV25 115-033289-00
T142 M6G-020034--- SV26 115-033289-00
T143 M6G-020034--- SV27 115-033289-00
T144 M90-000025--- PV28 115-031977-00
T145 M6G-020055--- RV 3101-30-68611
T146 M90-000025--- DIL(10mL) 0033-30-74615
T149 3001-10-07069 SH(10mL) 0033-30-74615
T150 3001-10-07069 ASP(100uL) 115-012523-00
T151 M90-000025--- SP(250uL) 115-039860-00
T152 M90-000025--- LYSE(2.5mLX3) 115-011900-00
T153 082-000108-00 DIFF Bath 3101-20-68312
T154 082-000108-00 WBC 3102-30-69221
T155 3001-10-07069 RBC 3102-30-69223
T156 3001-10-07069 VC 3001-30-07273
T157 3001-10-07069 PC 3101-30-68532
T158 3001-10-07069 LP2 3101-30-68351
T159 3001-10-07069 LP3 3101-30-68351
T160 3001-10-07069 GP 082-002497-00
T161 3001-10-07069 SPB 115-031804-00
T163 082-000108-00 Probe wipe 041-001013-00
Isolating
T164 082-000710-00 115-002439-00
chamber 1
Isolating
T165 M90-100031--- 115-002439-00
chamber 2
Isolating
T166 3001-10-07069 115-002439-00
chamber 3
T167 M90-100071--- Transducer M53-00112D---
T168 M90-000025--- Transducer M53-00112D---
T169 082-000108-00 Flow cell 041-006150-00
Bath shielding
T170 3101-20-68436
082-000108-00 cover
T171 M6G-020055--- LF1 115-011660-00
T172 M6G-020011--- LF2 0010-10-12408
T173 M6G-020011--- GF1 3001-10-07054
T174 0040-10-32301 GF2 3001-10-07054
T175 M6G-020006--- PS1 115-033322-00
Reagent
T176 M6G-020008--- 043-000829-00
detector LH
Reagent
T177 082-000422-00 043-000829-00
detector LEO(II)
Reagent
T178 082-000432-00 043-000829-00
detector LEO(I)
T179 082-000432-00 DH 115-008362-00
J1 082-000055-00 TS 024-000156-00
Reagent
J2 082-000055-00 043-000829-00
detector DIL
B-4
J3 082-000055-00 / /
J4 082-000055-00 / /
J5 082-000055-00 / /
J6 082-000055-00 / /
J7 082-000055-00 / /
J8 082-000055-00 / /
J9 082-000055-00 / /
J10 082-000055-00 / /
J11 0030-20-13339 / /
J12 0030-20-13339 / /
J13 0030-20-13339 / /
J14 0030-20-13339 / /
J15 0030-20-13339 / /
J17 082-000710-00 / /
J18 082-000710-00 / /
J19 082-000710-00 / /
J20 082-000710-00 / /
J21 082-000710-00 / /
J22 082-000710-00 / /
J23 082-000710-00 / /
J24 082-000710-00 / /
B-5
C Hardware System Connection Diagram
009-005649-00 Blood detection
photocoupler connecting wire Blood
detection
photocoupler
J1
051-002176-00
Optical-coupler board PCBA Optical System PC
(N) 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board(I)
J2 3101-30-68515 FS Preamplification Board(J)
3102-30-69197 051-001062-00
3101-30-68517 SS PReamplification board(K)
cable(connects the
Key Board Indicator board PCBA Autoloader
analyzer to PC)
009-000043-00
009-005650-00
(G) (F) assembly
Blood detection J1 J1
Network
l
tica
board connecting
009-002225-00 Optical system signal

op
nd
ra
wire
Autoloader mechanism
motor and sensor wire
to
ire etec
g w or d
tin
3102-20-69103
ec nt do
l ica
26-0 l wire
nn
co rtme
0 Opt
conn d key bo tor
harness
le a
wire
d u o mp
ca
g wire d
009- em contro
o
ar
m c
0 Indi
ple
am
0S
0022
45-0
9-0
51 009-002561-00 051-001122-00Mini
ectin
syst
02
d an
9-0 Network Network Board PCBA
0022
00
Adaptor extension wire (L)
boar
009-
J3 J6 J78
009-002227-00 High J79 J1
speed analog wire of
J7 J85 J3 J7 J8 J14
main control analog
009-002271-00 Data board and
board autoloader board serial port
009-002228-00 Low speed connecting wire
J8 analog wire of main control J86 J8 J12
051-002223-00 051-000985-01 051-000393-00
analog board
Analog Board PCBA Pinaster main control Autoloading board PCBA J16
(C) board PCBA (E) 009-002515-00 Mix
M1-X 009-002229-00 Digital wire of
J9 main control analog board
J77 (B) J11 mechanism motor and Mix
photocoupler assembly
M2-Y J15 connecting wire
J5 J6
009-002604-00 M3-ASP J5
J24 J81 J11
Syringe ground
wire rd
oa
M4-SP eb
riv
dd
an
a rd
bo
M5-SH ol
TH1 TH2 TH3 ntr
co line 00
、TS1 、TS2 、TS3 ain ting 9-
009-002281-00 Motor l m ec
M6-DIL wire harness ig ita onn
c an 0026
0D d A 03
009-002277-00 Heater 22
75
-0
ex C12 -00
-00 ten 0V A± 009-002601-00 D5V P12V and P24V power
connecting wire 9 sio 1
00 n w powe 2V
M7-
LYSE extension wire
ire r
J18 J17 J16 J14 J13

J19 00
Docking 9
an - 0
J15 d 02
SV13~SV29
009-002272-00 Drive board
J2 Docking P 2 28
valve 13-29 connecting wire 00 4V 6-0
051-000981-02 9
an -00 p 0
009-002284-00 Drive Drive board PCBA d 22 w ow D 5
V1~V12 board valve 1-12 J3 A 8 i re e V
(D) ou C1 7-0 ro P
connecting wire
tp 20 0 ut 12
009- ut V A pu V
009-002279-00 Pump connecting J4 J6 0026 w po ±1 t
P1~P3 and 02
wire
P12 -00 D5V ire w 2V
er
extens V power
ion w
J7 J8 J9 J9 J10 ire Docking 0
P1 09-0
2 V 022
an 86
ou d P2 -00 D
009-002288-00 Sampling assembly photocoupler
009-002276-00 Temperature
tpu 4V
009-002278-00 Float switch connecting wire
t w po 5V
sensor connecting wire
Syringe assembly
ire we 051-001146-00
connecting wire
009-002289-00
009-002280-00 Liquid detection board
r
photocoupler
009-002463-00 Sampling Power board PCBA

M2_SAMPLE-Y
assembly motor and (A)
Docking SEN2-X_POS
connecting wire
photocoupler connecting wire

SEN3-Y_UP
connecting wire
(closed)
ec swit 78
3101-20-68591
Socket ground
5
g w ch
ire
co ower 0-68
wire
P 1-2
tin
0
31
Temperature
nn
sensor Syringe
assembly
3101-20-68589 Switch
photocoupler and power board
T1-T4、AMBIENT
SEN6-ASP connecting wire
SEN7-SP
Float
Sampling SEN8-SH
assembly SEN9-DIL
Switch
sensor photocou SEN10-LYSE
051-000983-01 pler
Fluid detection board PCBA F1-F2 SEN1-X_INJ
SEN2-X_POS
(H) SEN3-Y_START
SEN5-VALVE
Hardware System Connection Diagram
C-1
PN:046-008700-00(7.0)

BC-5390 - Service Manual - V7.0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-5390 - Service Manual - V7.0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

. , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

This warranty shall not extend to:

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial

E-mail Address: service@mindray.com

Tel: +86 755 81888998

Fax: +86 755 26582680

US Contact: Mindray DS USA, Inc.

Address: 800 MacArthur Blvd., Mahwah, NJ 07430-0619,USA

Toll Free: +1(800) 288 2121

Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................1

1 Using This Manual ......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Name ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

3 Software System ........................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Password Function ................................................................................................... 3-1

4 Introduction of Major Parameters ................................................................................ 4-1

4.1 Parameter Sources .................................................................................................. 4-1

5 Instrument Warning Messages .................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Error code................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1.13 Other Errors .................................................................................................... 5-47

6 Luidic System ................................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Measurement Flow ................................................................................................... 6-1

7 Optical System............................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle ...................................................................... 7-1

8 Hardware System .......................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.8 Power Board........................................................................................................... 8-33

8.16 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches ........................................................... 8-57

9 Mechanical System ....................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Analyzer Structure .................................................................................................... 9-1

10 Description and Replacement Instruction for Wearing Items ............................. 10-1

10.1 When to Replace and the Tools Needed ............................................................... 10-1

10.7 Replacing the Rubber Pinch Valve Tubing ............................................................. 10-9

Appendix ............................................................................................................................... A-1

 Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

 Comprehensive knowledge of circuit and fluidics;

 Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;

 Comprehensive knowledge of controls;

 Comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;

 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;

 Using basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology;

 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope;

 Reading pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.

1.3 General Operations

press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK it

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

WARNING, LASER BEAM